WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to
chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA
US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on
products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be
found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-423-6343 or by contacting your
dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling
1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and
conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................7
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................12
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................................56
4STARTING AND OPERATING ..................................................................................................71
5MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................106
6SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................159
7IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .....................................................................................................199
8SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................223
9TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................273
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................280
11INDEX.............................................................................................................................................285
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY ....................................................................... 8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ......................... 8
SYMBOL GLOSSARY............................................................. 9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS .....................................................................................12
Key Fob........................................................................ 12
SENTRY KEY ........................................................................15
IGNITION SWITCH .............................................................15
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .................................... 15
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED ......................................17
How To Use Remote Start .......................................... 17
To Exit Remote Start Mode ........................................ 18
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped .................................................................. 18
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped.......... 18
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped ............................................. 19
Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped........... 19
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ..................19
To Arm The System ..................................................... 19
To Disarm The System................................................ 19
Rearming The System................................................. 20
Security System Manual Override.............................. 20
Tamper Alert................................................................ 20
DELUXE VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED........................................................................20
To Arm The System ..................................................... 20
To Disarm The System................................................ 20
Security System Manual Override.............................. 21
DOORS .................................................................................21
Manual Door Locks......................................................21
Power Door Locks .......................................................22
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Passive Entry................................................................22
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped .........................24
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit.................................24
STEERING WHEEL............................................................... 24
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped...................................................................24
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped...................................................................25
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped........................25
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ....................................26
Introducing Voice Recognition ....................................26
Basic Voice Commands...............................................26
Get Started...................................................................26
Additional Information.................................................27
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED .................27
Programming The Memory Feature............................28
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To Memory.........28
Memory Position Recall...............................................28
SEATS...................................................................................28
Manual Adjustment
(Front Seats) — If Equipped.........................................29
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ...............................30
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped.........30
Heated Seats — If Equipped .......................................31
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped.........................32
Vehicles Without Passenger Seating Installed ..........32
Passenger Seat Easy Entry .........................................33
Head Restraints...........................................................34
MIRRORS ............................................................................ 35
Inside Rearview Mirror................................................ 35
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors .......................................... 35
Outside Mirrors............................................................ 35
Power Mirrors .............................................................. 36
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................................... 36
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) .................................................................... 36
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® ............ 36
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ....................... 37
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code
Or Non-Rolling Code Device........................................ 37
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener ......................................................................... 37
Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous
Device .......................................................................... 38
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button........... 38
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .................... 38
Security ........................................................................ 39
Troubleshooting Tips................................................... 39
EXTERIOR LIGHTS .............................................................. 39
Headlight Switch.......................................................... 39
Multifunction Lever ..................................................... 40
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If Equipped.......... 40
High/Low Beam Switch .............................................. 40
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped................................................................... 40
Flash-To-Pass............................................................... 41
Automatic Headlights ................................................. 41
Parking Lights ............................................................. 41
Automatic Headlights With Wipers............................. 41
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
Headlight Time Delay ................................................. 41
Lights-On Reminder ................................................... 41
Fog Lights — If Equipped ............................................ 42
Turn Signals .............................................................. 42
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped............................. 42
INTERIOR LIGHTS ...............................................................42
Front Map/Reading Lights ........................................ 42
Ambient Light — If Equipped ...................................... 42
Dimmer Controls ........................................................ 43
Illuminated Entry ........................................................ 43
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ...........................44
Windshield Wiper Operation....................................... 44
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped........................... 45
CLIMATE CONTROLS ..........................................................45
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions ............................................................. 45
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...................... 48
Climate Voice Commands .......................................... 48
Operating Tips ............................................................ 48
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ............................49
Storage ........................................................................ 49
Illuminated Cupholders — If Equipped....................... 50
USB/AUX Control......................................................... 50
Electrical Power Outlets.............................................. 50
WINDOWS............................................................................52
Power Window Controls.............................................. 52
Wind Buffeting............................................................. 52
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED...................................52
Opening And Closing The Sunroof ............................. 53
Pinch Protect Feature — If Equipped ......................... 53
Sunshade Operation................................................... 53
Sunroof Maintenance................................................. 53
Ignition Off Operation.................................................. 53
HOOD....................................................................................54
Opening The Hood .......................................................54
Closing The Hood.........................................................54
TRUNK ..................................................................................54
Opening The Trunk ......................................................54
Closing The Trunk ........................................................55
Trunk Safety ................................................................55
Cargo Area Features....................................................55
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .....................................................56
Instrument Cluster Descriptions.................................57
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY.....................................57
Location And Controls .................................................58
Engine Oil Life Reset ...................................................59
Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) — If Equipped .......59
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Menu Items..................................................................60
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver
Mode Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped..................................................62
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................................63
Red Warning Lights .....................................................63
Yellow Warning Lights .................................................66
Yellow Indicator Lights ................................................68
Green Indicator Lights.................................................68
White Indicator Lights..................................................69
Blue Indicator Lights....................................................69
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .....................69
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ...............................................................70
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ........................................................................70
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE...................................................... 71
Manual Transmission — If Equipped.......................... 71
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped...................... 71
Normal Starting ........................................................... 71
AutoPark ...................................................................... 72
Extended Park Starting ............................................... 73
If Engine Fails To Start ............................................... 74
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) .......................................... 74
After Starting................................................................ 74
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
3.6L & 5.7L ......................................................................... 74
PARKING BRAKE................................................................ 74
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED ...................... 76
6-Speed Manual Transmission................................... 76
Shifting......................................................................... 76
Recommended Shift Speeds...................................... 77
1–4 Skip Shift ............................................................. 77
Downshifting................................................................ 77
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................................... 78
Ignition Park Interlock................................................. 78
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock
(BTSI) System ............................................................. 79
8-Speed Automatic Transmission ............................. 79
SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE
CONTROL............................................................................. 83
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L — IF EQUIPPED .......... 83
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING ........................................... 83
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED ................. 84
Cruise Control ............................................................. 84
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .................................... 85
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED .........92
ParkSense Sensors..................................................... 92
ParkSense Display ...................................................... 92
ParkSense Warning Display ....................................... 94
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense............................ 94
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System..... 94
Cleaning The ParkSense System ............................... 95
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ..................... 95
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ..............................96
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ..................................................96
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .................................. 97
VEHICLE LOADING ..............................................................97
Vehicle Certification Label ......................................... 98
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ........................ 98
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ............................. 98
Overloading ................................................................. 98
Loading ....................................................................... 98
TRAILER TOWING ...............................................................98
Common Towing Definitions ...................................... 99
Trailer Hitch Classification........................................ 100
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)........................... 100
Trailer And Tongue Weight ...................................... 101
Towing Requirements...............................................101
Towing Tips ...............................................................103
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) ................................................. 104
DRIVING TIPS ................................................................... 104
Driving On Slippery Surfaces.................................... 104
Driving Through Water ............................................. 105
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ..................................................... 106
CYBERSECURITY ............................................................. 106
UCONNECT SETTINGS .................................................... 107
Customer Programmable Features ......................... 107
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION............................................ 121
System Overview ...................................................... 121
Drag & Drop Menu Bar............................................. 123
Safety And General Information .............................. 123
UCONNECT MODES ......................................................... 124
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................................ 124
Radio Mode .............................................................. 125
Media Mode ............................................................. 133
Phone Mode ............................................................. 135
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® —
IF EQUIPPED .................................................................... 144
Android Auto™ ......................................................... 144
Apple CarPlay®......................................................... 146
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips
And Tricks.................................................................. 147
PERFORMANCE PAGES .................................................. 148
Home ......................................................................... 148
Timers........................................................................ 150
Gauges ...................................................................... 152
G-Force ...................................................................... 152
Engine........................................................................ 153
Dynamometer (Dyno) ............................................... 153
DODGE DRIVE MODES — IF EQUIPPED......................... 154
Performance Control — If Equipped ........................ 154
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.................. 158
Regulatory And Safety Information.......................... 158
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ...........................................................159
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................159
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...................160
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......................................164
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped ............164
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Operation —
If Equipped.................................................................167
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ................168
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................................172
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....................172
Important Safety Precautions...................................172
Seat Belt Systems ....................................................172
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ..................178
Child Restraints ........................................................185
SAFETY TIPS......................................................................196
Transporting Passengers ..........................................196
Transporting Pets ...................................................196
Connected Vehicles...................................................196
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ...............................................................196
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ..................................................198
Exhaust Gas...............................................................198
Carbon Monoxide Warnings .....................................198
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ..................................... 199
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED .................. 199
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING...................................... 202
Preparations For Jacking.......................................... 202
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ......................... 202
Jacking And Changing A Tire ................................... 203
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ................................. 206
Alternate Tire Service Kit — If Equipped .................. 211
JUMP STARTING .............................................................. 216
Preparations For Jump Start .................................... 216
Jump Starting Procedure.......................................... 217
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ........................................ 218
MANUAL PARK RELEASE–8–SPEED
TRANSMISSION ............................................................... 218
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE............................................ 220
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ..................................... 221
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models — If Equipped.......... 222
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models ............................. 222
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) ............................................................... 222
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ..................................... 222
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ................................................ 223
3.6L And 5.7L Engines ............................................ 223
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ................................................ 228
3.6L Engine .............................................................. 228
5.7L Engine .............................................................. 229
Checking Oil Level .................................................... 230
Adding Washer Fluid................................................. 230
Maintenance-Free Battery ....................................... 231
Pressure Washing..................................................... 231
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................................................. 231
Engine Oil ................................................................. 231
Engine Oil Filter......................................................... 233
Engine Air Cleaner Filter........................................... 233
Air Conditioner Maintenance ................................... 234
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection............................... 235
Body Lubrication....................................................... 235
Windshield Wiper Blades ......................................... 236
Exhaust System ........................................................ 237
Cooling System ......................................................... 237
Brake System ........................................................... 240
Clutch Hydraulic System —
Manual Transmission (If Equipped) ........................ 240
Manual Transmission — If Equipped ....................... 240
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ................... 241
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped ...................... 241
Rear Axle ................................................................... 241
Fuses ......................................................................... 242
Bulb Replacement.................................................... 250
TIRES..................................................................................253
Tire Safety Information .............................................253
Tires — General Information .....................................261
Tire Types...................................................................264
Spare Tires — If Equipped.........................................264
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care.....................................266
Snow Traction Devices .............................................267
Tire Rotation Recommendations .............................268
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ...................................................268
Treadwear..................................................................268
Traction Grades.........................................................269
Temperature Grades.................................................269
VEHICLE STORAGE ...........................................................269
BODYWORK ......................................................................270
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ......................270
Body And Underbody Maintenance..........................270
Preserving The Bodywork .........................................270
INTERIORS ........................................................................271
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................................271
Plastic And Coated Parts ..........................................271
Leather Surfaces.......................................................272
Glass Surfaces ..........................................................272
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)..................... 273
BRAKE SYSTEM................................................................ 273
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .............. 273
Torque Specifications ............................................... 273
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................... 274
3.6L Engine ...............................................................274
5.7L Engine (With Automatic Transmission)........... 274
5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission) ...............274
Reformulated Gasoline............................................. 275
Materials Added To Fuel .......................................... 275
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends..................................... 275
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles.............275
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications .................. 276
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline ................................. 276
Fuel System Cautions...............................................276
FLUID CAPACITIES ........................................................... 277
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............................... 278
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............................. 279
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................ 280
Prepare For The Appointment.................................. 280
Prepare A List............................................................ 280
Be Reasonable With Requests ................................ 280
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ............................................. 280
Roadside Assistance ................................................ 280
FCA US LLC Customer Center .................................. 281
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .......................... 281
Mexico ....................................................................... 281
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands........................... 281
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .................................... 282
Service Contract ...................................................... 282
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................................282
MOPAR® PARTS ..............................................................282
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ......................................282
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C........282
In Canada...................................................................283
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .......................................283
GENERAL INFORMATION.................................................284
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS.......................284
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Dodge vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This Owner's Manual has been
prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented
documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining
its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important
warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should
only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or
may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible
way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial
reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Dodge best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.
1
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
These statements apply to operating procedures that
could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements apply to procedures that could result in
damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation, operation,
and reliability. If not followed, may result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier use of the
product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on a
particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information pertaining to the
topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness
and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH when using “Track-Use” parts and equipment:
NEVER use any “Track-Use” equipment on public roads. FCA US LLC does not autho-
rize the use of “Track-Use” equipment on public roads.
The intended use of “Track-Use” parts is for race vehicles on race tracks. To help
ensure the safety of the race driver, engineers should supervise the installation of
“Track-Use” parts.
FCA US LLC does not authorize the installation or use of any part noted as
“Track-Use” on any new vehicle prior to its first retail sale.
WARNING!
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS remove any “Track-Use” equipment before driving on public roads.
ALWAYS properly use your three-point seat belts when driving on public roads.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers,
or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating
your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol
Ú page 63.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 63
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 64
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 64
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 64
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 65
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 65
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 64
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 65
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 65
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 66
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 65
Trunk Open Warning Light
Ú page 65
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 66
Red Warning Lights
1
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
Yellow Warning Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 67
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 66
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 66
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 67
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 66
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 66
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Ú page 67
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light
Ú page 67
Service AWD Warning Light
Ú page 67
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Light
Ú page 66
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light
Ú page 68
Yellow Warning Lights
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target Vehicle Indicator Light
Ú page 68
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Vehicle Indicator Light
Ú page 68
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 68
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 68
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 69
ECO Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 69
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
Ú page 69
Sport Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 69
White Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 69
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 69
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 69
Green Indicator Lights
1
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), Remote Start
(if equipped), and remote trunk operation. The key fob
allows you to lock or unlock the doors and trunk from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob
does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system. The key fob also contains an emergency key,
which is stored in the rear of the key fob.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the key
fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other
electronic device. This may result in poor performance.
With ignition in the ON position and the vehicle moving
at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are disabled.
Key Fob
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted
battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to
the instrument cluster, which will display directions to
follow
Ú page 284.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Trunk
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver's door or twice within five seconds to
unlock all doors. Push and release the lock button on the
key fob to lock all doors.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash
and the illuminated entry features will be activated. When
the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash and the
horn will chirp. This setting can be adjusted in the
Uconnect system
Ú page 107.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked with the key fob, and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock and
the Vehicle Security system (if equipped) will arm.
If one or more doors are open, or the trunk is open, the
doors will lock. The doors will unlock again automati-
cally if the key fob is left inside the passenger compart-
ment, otherwise the doors will stay locked.
1 — Unlock
2 — Trunk Open
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start (If Equipped)
5 — PANIC Button
6 — Emergency Key
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push
of the unlock button through Uconnect Settings
Ú page 107.
NOTE:
When you use the key fob to open any door, the courtesy
lights, overhead lights, and approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped) will turn on.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Push the trunk button on the key fob two times within five
seconds to unlatch the trunk.
Using The Panic Feature
To turn the Panic feature on or off, push the Panic button
on the key fob. When the Panic feature is activated, the
turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and
the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic feature will stay on for three minutes unless you
turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a second time
or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or
greater.
NOTE:
The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition in
the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic feature is
activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will
remain on.
You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic
feature due to the radio frequency noises emitted by
the system.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and visual
alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along with
a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in order for
the vehicle to detect a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle
feature will not activate until all of the doors are closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations where
the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob
inside.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin battery
dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding the
emergency key release (1) on the back of the key fob
and pulling the emergency key out with your other
hand.
Emergency Key Removal
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Separate the key fob halves using a flat-head
screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry the two halves of
the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
Separating Case With A Coin
NOTE:
Separating the case can also be done with a flat-head
screwdriver.
Separating Case With A Flat-Head Screwdriver
Key Fob Battery Replacement
3. Remove the back cover to access and replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the (+)
sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the inside of the
battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching
the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from children.
If the battery compartment does not close securely,
stop using the product and keep it away from
children.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle elec-
tronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match
the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a
key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used
to start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle
electronics, the engine will start and shut off after two
seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should
this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible
by an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics Ú page 284.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in the
OFF position when exiting the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The START/STOP ignition button has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During START, RUN
will illuminate.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm, etc.)
are still available.
ACC
Engine is not started.
Some electrical devices are available
(e.g. power windows).
ON/RUN
Driving position.
All electrical devices are available
(e.g. climate controls, etc.).
START
The engine will start.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with the push of a
button, the key fob may have a low or depleted battery. In
this situation, a backup method can be used to operate
the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the START/STOP
ignition button and push to operate the ignition switch.
Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter
‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always
remove key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
NOTE:
When opening the driver's door with the ignition in
ON/RUN (engine not running), a chime will sound to
remind you to place the ignition in the OFF position.
In addition to the chime, the message will display
“Ignition Or Accessory On” in the cluster.
For more information on proper engine starting
procedures, see
Ú page 71.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range
of 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold weather,
and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient
conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce
this range Ú page 284.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp
(if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the
vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a
15 minute cycle. Pushing the Remote Start button a third
time shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power sunroof opera-
tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in
the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated for
a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Trunk closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
System not disabled from previous Remote Start event
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition in the OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, either push and release the unlock button on the
key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security system (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again, or if
the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
climate controls will resume the previously set operations
(temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will show in the instrument
cluster display until you push the START/STOP ignition
button.
Remote Start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 RPM.
Any engine warning lights come on.
The Low Fuel Light turns on.
The hood is opened.
The hazard switch is pushed.
The gear selector is moved out of PARK.
The brake pedal is pressed.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or less.
The timing is dependent on the ambient temperature.
Once the timer expires, the system will automatically
adjust the settings depending on ambient conditions.
See “Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the
next section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear defrost
will automatically turn on in cold weather. The heated
steering wheel and driver heated seat feature will turn on
if selected in the Comfort menu screen within Uconnect
Settings
Ú page 107. In warm weather, the driver vented
seat feature will automatically turn on when Remote Start
is activated, if programmed in the Comfort menu screen.
The vehicle will adjust the climate control settings
depending on the outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls will be automatically adjusted to the
optimal temperature and mode settings depending on the
outside ambient temperature. This will occur until the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the
climate controls will resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
climate settings will default to maximum heat, with
fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost timer
expires, the vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to 78°F
(26°C), the climate settings will be based on the last
settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or above, the
climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level Mode,
with Recirculation on.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see Ú page 45.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of Remote
Start until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
The climate control settings will change if manually
adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in Remote Start
mode, and exit automatic override. This includes the OFF
button on the climate controls, which will turn the system
off.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E-ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE —
I
F EQUIPPED
One of the following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote
start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Canceled — Trunk Open
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors for
unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition
for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security
system is armed, interior switches for door locks and trunk
release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security system will provide the following audible
and visible signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will
flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
door handle with a valid key fob available in the
same exterior zone
Ú page 22.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the door
Ú page 22.
Push the START/STOP ignition button (requires at least
one valid key fob in the vehicle).
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security
system.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
Security system will arm, regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REARMING THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the horn off
after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds between cycles
and up to eight cycles if the trigger remains active) and
then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
TAMPER ALERT
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security system in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
DELUXE VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Deluxe Vehicle Security system monitors the doors,
hood latch, and trunk for unauthorized entry and the
ignition switch for unauthorized operation. The system
also includes a dual function intrusion sensor and vehicle
tilt sensor. The intrusion sensor monitors the vehicle
interior for motion. The vehicle tilt sensor monitors the
vehicle for any tilting actions (tow away, tire removal, ferry
transport, etc.).
If a perimeter violation triggers the security system, the
horn will sound for 29 seconds and the exterior lights will
flash followed by approximately five seconds of no activity.
This will continue for eight cycles if no action is taken to
disarm the system.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the security system:
1. If any doors, windows, or the sunroof (if equipped)
are open, close them.
2. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
3. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
door handle with a key fob available in the same
exterior zone
Ú page 22.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
When armed, the interior motion sensor detects move-
ment within the vehicle's interior, including moving
objects (i.e. people and pets) and air currents through
open windows or the sunroof. The windows and
sunroof should be closed, and moving objects should
not be left in the vehicle when the intrusion detection
is armed, otherwise false alarms can occur.
Once the security system is armed, it remains in that
state until you disarm it by following either of the
disarming procedures described. If a power loss occurs
after arming the system, you must disarm the system
after restoring power to prevent alarm activation.
The ultrasonic intrusion sensor (motion detector)
actively monitors your vehicle every time you arm the
Vehicle Security system. If you prefer, you can turn off
the ultrasonic intrusion sensor when arming the
Vehicle Security system. To do so, push the lock button
on the key fob three times within 15 seconds of arming
the system (while the Vehicle Security Light is flashing
rapidly). The vehicle will remain locked but will disable
the alarm in the case of repeated false alarms due to
ambient conditions.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the door
Ú page 22.
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position
by pushing the START/STOP ignition button (requires at
least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security
system.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed during
power trunk entry. If a valid key fob or key fob Passive
Entry is used to open the trunk, the motion sensing will
be suppressed until after the trunk is closed. If
someone enters the opened vehicle through the trunk,
then opens any door, the alarm will sound.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The ultrasonic intrusion sensor (motion detector)
actively monitors your vehicle every time you arm the
Vehicle Security system. If you prefer, you can turn off
the ultrasonic intrusion sensor when arming the
Vehicle Security system. To do so, push the lock button
on the key fob three times within 15 seconds of arming
the system (while the Vehicle Security Light is flashing
rapidly). The vehicle will remain locked but will disable
the alarm in the case of repeated false alarms due to
ambient conditions.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
Security system will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked from inside
the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock each door,
push the door lock knob on each door trim panel
downward. To unlock each door, pull the door lock knob on
each door trim panel upward.
Door Lock Knob
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the
door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE:
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the Vehicle
Security system.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking brake,
place the ignition in the OFF position, remove the key
fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors, and lock
your vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal
injuries and death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on each door
trim panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition is
on, and either door is open, the power locks will not
operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the
key fob in the vehicle. Placing the ignition in the OFF
position, or closing the door will allow the locks to operate.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop,
or other electronic device, the wireless signal may get
blocked, and the driver’s door may not unlock
automatically.
If a door is open with the ignition either placed in the ACC
or ON/RUN (engine not running) position, a chime will
sound as a reminder.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ —
P
ASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through
Uconnect Settings
Ú page 107.
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Passive
Entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
Passive Entry handle from locking/unlocking the
vehicle.
Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated approach
(low beams, license plate lamp, position lamps)
for whichever duration is set between 0, 30, 60
or 90 seconds. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates
two flashes of the turn signals.
If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing, or
there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry door
handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting
in a slower response time.
The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the
Passive Entry door handles, if the key fob is located
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock and
(if equipped) will arm the Vehicle Security system.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door
handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle. Grabbing
the driver’s door handle will unlock the driver door
automatically. Grabbing the passenger door handle will
unlock both doors automatically. The interior door panel
lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock when
you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system
Ú page 107.
All doors will unlock when the front passenger door
handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition is in the OFF position.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any Passive Entry vehicle.
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key
fob while a door is open.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a Passive Entry key fob inside the car, and it does
not detect any Passive Entry key fobs outside the car, the
car will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive
Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected outside the vehicle. The
vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following
conditions are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then the doors are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry
door handle.
To Enter The Trunk:
With a Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck
lid, push the button located on the center of the light bar
which is located on the deck lid above the license plate.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
NOTE:
If you inadvertently leave your vehicle's Passive Entry key
fob in the trunk and try to close the deck lid, the deck lid
will automatically unlatch, unless another one of the
vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs is outside the vehicle and
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck lid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of either door handle, pushing the Passive Entry
lock button will lock both doors.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is depleted.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob
lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s
interior door panel
Ú page 284.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto
door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by an
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if:
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 107.
The driver door is opened.
The doors were not previously unlocked.
NOTE:
The doors will also unlock automatically when the gear
selector was not previously in the PARK position, then
is placed into the PARK position.
Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in
accordance with local laws.
STEERING WHEEL
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located
below the steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering
column control is located below the multifunction lever on
the steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Control
Use the four-way control to adjust the steering column.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Settings, use
the key fob or the memory switch on the driver's door trim
panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to
saved positions
Ú page 27.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an average of
80 minutes before automatically shutting off. This time
will vary based on environmental temperatures. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel button is located within the
Uconnect system. You can access the button through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a second time
to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel
to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 18.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your vehicle’s Voice
Recognition (VR) system.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the Apps
menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the
Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C
with 8.4-inch display system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following Voice Commands can be given at any point
while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session
“
Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your VR system’s
status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
GET STARTED
The Voice Recognition (VR) button is used to activate/
deactivate your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push the Voice Recognition (VR) button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice Command
from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc.
Ú page 284.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call:
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or call:
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
(French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visit www.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit https://www.driveucon-
nect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call:
1-877-324-9091
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
Each memory profile saves desired position settings for
the following features:
Driver seat cushion
Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (if equipped)
Side mirrors
Power tilt/telescoping steering column (if equipped)
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can be
linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
Be sure to program the radio presets prior to program-
ming the memory settings.
The memory settings switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
of two saved memory profiles.
Memory Settings Switch
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And Send Or
Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio,
Media, Navigation, And Climate Functions
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the selected profile
from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and
telescopic steering column [if equipped], and radio
station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory
switch, and then push the desired memory button
(1 or 2) within five seconds. The instrument cluster
display will display which memory position has been
set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY FOB
T
O MEMORY
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two
saved memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must select the
“Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 107.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release
the set (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1) or
(2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will
display in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory settings
by pushing the set (S) button, followed by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob within 10 seconds.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK, a
message will be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two, push
the desired memory button number (1 or 2) or the unlock
button on the key fob linked to the desired memory
position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is
canceled, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the memory
settings are recalled when using Passive Entry to unlock
the driver's door with a linked key fob.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
(FRONT SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a
bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.
Adjusting Bar Location
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Manual Front Seat Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide
additional storage area. Pull on the loops located on the
upper part of the rear seatback to fold down either or both
seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when not in
use.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from
the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an
extended period of time. This is normal and, by simply
unfolding the seats to the open position, over time the
seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
Folding Rear Seatback Loop Locations
Folded Rear Seat
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The power seat switches are located on the outboard side
of the front seats. The power seat switches control the
movement of the seat. Vehicles equipped with power seat
controls will have a manual recline lever.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position)
should not be used as a play area by children when
the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously
injured in a collision. Children should be seated and
using the proper restraint system.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Power Seat Controls
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward by
using the power seat switch. The seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down by
using the power seat switch. The seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down
using the power seat switch. The front of the seat cushion
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you
have the driver seat positioned when you place the
vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater
than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set posi-
tion when you place the vehicle’s ignition in the ACC or
ON/RUN position.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is disabled when the driver
seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and Easy
Exit positions are stored in each memory setting profile
Ú page 27.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled through
the programmable features in the Uconnect system
Ú page 107.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
On some models, the front seats may be equipped with
heaters located in the seat cushions and seatbacks.
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Lumbar Switch
3 — Manual Recline Lever
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control buttons through the
climate screen and the controls screen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings. The
indicator arrows in touchscreen buttons indicate the level
of heat in use. Two indicator arrows will illuminate for HI,
and one for LO. Turning the heating elements off will
return the user to the radio screen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting
on.
Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the
LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto-
matically switch to LO-level after approximately
60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
display will change from HI to LO, indicating the
change. The LO-level setting will turn off automatically
after approximately 45 minutes.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 18.
FRONT VENTILATED SEATS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The ventilated seats are equipped with fans
that can be controlled through the climate and
control screen in the Uconnect system. The
fans operate at two speeds: HI and LO.
Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn the
ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 18.
VEHICLES WITHOUT PASSENGER
S
EATING INSTALLED
All passenger occupants within the vehicle must be in a
seat equipped with a Seat Belt System and Head Restraint
for the safety of the passenger. If the passenger and/or
rear seats have been removed, do not ride in those areas.
This vehicle has been designed to maximize total
performance. In doing so, the deletion of passenger seats
and/or rear seat may affect the Noise, Vibration, and
Harshness (NVH) characteristics. As a result, the interior
will be louder overall.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
WARNING!
If the passenger and/or rear seats have been
removed, do not ride in those areas. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
If this vehicle was not factory equipped with a
passenger seat, NEVER attempt to install a
passenger seat because the safety systems,
including the air bags and seat belt, may not properly
protect you.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
PASSENGER SEAT EASY ENTRY
On the passenger seat, pull forward on the lever located
on the side of the seatback in order to dump the seatback
and slide the seat forward. You can also temporarily
remove the seat belt from the guide loop on the seat and
allow the seat belt to retract out of the way. This allows for
easier access to the rear seat. To return the seat to a
normal seating position, first return the seatback to its
original recline location and then slide the entire seatback
to the preset lock position.
Easy Entry Lever
NOTE:
The front passenger seat needs to slide back to a
preset position for the fore/aft adjuster to be properly
locked. For example, if the front passenger has the
seat adjusted full rear and exits the vehicle to let a rear
passenger enter using the easy entry handle, the fore/
aft adjuster needs to slide back about 2/3 of the way
rearward to hit the lock position. If the adjuster is not
returned to this preset position, the seat will appear to
be loose.
If the front passenger uses the easy entry handle and
then lifts up the recliner handle without moving the
seatback to its original preset position, the recliner will
not lock until it is moved to the full recline position.
Driver’s Side Easy Entry
The easy entry lever on the outboard side of the driver’s
seatback will dump the seatback forward to allow for
easier access to the rear seats. The seat bottom will not
slide forward as the passenger side easy entry will. If
needed, use the driver’s side seat control to slide forward.
To return the seat to the normal position, push the
seatback up and it will lock into the previously set recline
position. Then if needed, use the seat control to adjust the
forward/rearward position.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
this area are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Only ride in available seating positions equipped with
seat belt systems. Always properly wear your seat
belt. Failure to do so could result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death in the event of an accident.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or
not an air bag is also provided at their seating posi-
tions to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in
the event of a crash.
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat if the head
restraints are not in place of their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
WARNING!
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear of the
head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain addi-
tional clearance to the back of your head.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact, the RHR will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the RHR.
The RHR will automatically return to their normal position
following a rear impact. If the RHR do not return to their
normal position, see an authorized dealer immediately.
Head Restraint
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located at the base of the head restraint and push
downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, remove the seat belt from
the seat belt loop. Raise the head restraint as far as it can
go. Then, push the adjustment button and the release
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes while pushing the
adjustment button and release button. Then, adjust it to
the appropriate height.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to recline the front seat before
removing the head restraint to provide enough clearance
from the roof.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear outboard head restraints are non-adjustable and
are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head
movement in the event of a rear impact.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3 — Seat Belt Loop
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
previously described reinstallation instructions prior
to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a colli-
sion and could result in serious injury or death.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Automatic Dimming Mirror
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s rear view.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off
through the touchscreen.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the
visors and lift the cover.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Slide-On-Rod And Extender
Feature
The sun visor Slide-On-Rod feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun blockage.
Slide-On-Rod Extender
To use the extender feature of the sun visor, grab the
extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull
rearward.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of the
adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
NOTE:
The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much
wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror switch is located on the driver's side door
trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push the mirror select button for the mirror that you want
to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror
to move.
Power Mirror Control
NOTE:
A light in the select button will illuminate indicating the
mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
This feature will be activated whenever you
turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped)
Ú page 45.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®)
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
HomeLink® replaces up to three
hand-held transmitters that operate
devices such as garage door
openers, motorized gates, lighting,
or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your
vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the over-
head console or sunvisor designate the three different
HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will
activate the devices they are programmed to with each
press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security system
is active Ú page 284.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended that a
new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system. Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are trying to
program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of your
HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
1 — Left Mirror Selection
2 — Mirror Adjustment
3 — Right Mirror Selection
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I
and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the HomeLink®
indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your HomeLink®
buttons, you must determine whether the device has a
rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device with
a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
located where the antenna is attached to the device. The
button may not be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may vary slightly
by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN” or
“TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate your
garage door opener motor, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
button you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the garage door
opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this
happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code final
steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code final
step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener
motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
the final steps for the rolling code procedure.
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
the steps from the beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure as
programming to a garage door opener
Ú page 37. Be sure
to determine if the device has a rolling code, or non-rolling
code before beginning the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to
pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner. The procedure may need to
be performed multiple times to successfully pair the
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the new
device you want to program the HomeLink® button to has
a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3.
Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2 in
“Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, place
the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure while
programming HomeLink® with the engine on that your
vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the garage door
remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light
in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button
while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transmitter. Do
not program the transmitter if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the transmitter.
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and
can cause you and others to be severely injured or
killed.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pushed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® universal transmitter is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here
are some of the most common solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for a rolling code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog
lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transmitter. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transmitter. Do
not program the transmitter if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transmitter with a garage door opener that has a
“stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the headlight
switch is placed in the parking lights position. However,
the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along
with the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel
lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate
the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise from the parking lights and instrument panel
lights position to the first detent to turn the headlight
switch to the AUTO position. Rotate to the second detent
to turn on headlights, parking lights, and instrument panel
lights operation.
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when the engine
is started and will remain on unless the headlamps are
turned to the on position, the parking brake is applied, or
the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front fog
lights are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was
purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be turned
on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 107.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side), or
on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard warning
lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the
multifunction lever back will turn the low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating
high beam control through the use of a camera mounted
on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle specific
light and automatically switches from high beams to low
beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 107.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
to ensure proper performance. See a local authorized
dealer.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will
cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on,
until the lever is released.
NOTE:
If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to pass
position for more than 20 seconds, the high beams will
shut off.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO
position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the automatic mode.
PARKING LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off the
parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O
(off) position.
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the headlight
switch is placed in the parking lights position. However,
the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along
with the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS WITH WIPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is
running, they will automatically turn on when the wiper
system is on. This feature is programmable through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 107.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight delay
feature will leave the headlights on for up to 90 seconds.
This delay is initiated when the ignition is placed in the OFF
position while the headlight switch is on, and then the
headlight switch is cycled off within 45 seconds.
Headlight delay can be canceled by either turning the
headlight switch on then off, or by placing the ignition in
the ON position.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system
Ú page 107.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, the vehicle will chime when
the driver's door is opened.
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or
the low beam headlights, and push the fog light button on
the headlight switch.
Fog Light Switch
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are
on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam. An
indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display and a continuous chime will sound
if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights were
turned on manually, or are on because a door is open.
The battery protection also includes the glove
compartment light and the trunk light (if equipped).
To restore interior light operation after automatic battery
protection is enabled (lights off), either place the ignition
in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light switch.
FRONT MAP/READING LIGHTS
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pushing the
lens. Push the lens a second time to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when the
unlock button on the remote keyless entry key fob is
pushed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully
upward, to the second detent.
Map/Reading Lights
AMBIENT LIGHT — IF EQUIPPED
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility
of the floor and center console area.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Rotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to
increase or decrease the brightness of the door handle
lights, map pocket lights, and ambient light located in the
overhead console.
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
(Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
DIMMER CONTROLS
The dimmer controls are part of the headlight switch and
are located on the left side of the instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the
instrument panel lights and illuminated cupholders (if
equipped).
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Instrument Panel Dimmer (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control downward to
the O (off) position, and the interior lights will remain off
when the doors are open.
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the
first detent to brighten all text displays such as the
odometer, instrument cluster display, and radio when the
parking lights or headlights are on. Rotating the
instrument panel dimmer control completely upward to
the second detent will turn on the interior lights. The
interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in
this position.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob
to unlock the doors or open any door.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch
is placed in the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
The courtesy lights will not turn off if the instrument panel
dimmer control is rotated upward to the second detent.
The courtesy lights will turn off after 10 minutes when the
ignition is placed in the OFF position to protect the battery.
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
instrument panel dimmer control is rotated all the way
down to the O (off) position.
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ACC or
ON/RUN position.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
Intermittent Wipers
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
position, and then turn the end of the lever to select the
desired delay interval. There are four delay settings, which
allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of
one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 36
seconds between cycles. The delay intervals will double in
duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or
less.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering wheel) and hold. If the lever is pushed
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and
operate for two cycles after the end of the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected.
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the
off position, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
and then turn off.
Mist
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the MIST position
and release for a single wiping cycle. The wipers will
continue to operate until you release the multifunction
lever.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
shield. The washer function must be used in order to spray
the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
Ú page 236.
1 — Push End Inward For Washer
2 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation And Mist
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the
defroster before and during windshield washer use.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through
an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield
wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any
position other than off.
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the off
position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off
and the blades cannot return to the off position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end of the
multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this
feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive.
Wiper delay position three should be used for normal rain
conditions.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the
windshield.
Use of products containing wax or silicone may reduce
Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect system
Ú page 107.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first
placed in the ON position, the Rain Sensing system will
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
speed is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside
temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the ignition
is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL position,
the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper
switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of the
NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with
the Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers are not
operational when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic
Climate Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the
touchscreen to change the current setting to
the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing and
releasing the button again will cause the MAX A/C
operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin.
NOTE:
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if
needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the
front of the radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode. The
Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate
when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions such as smoke,
odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation
can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield.
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing
the mode control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is
not recommended. Recirculation mode may automatically
adjust to optimize customer experience for warming,
cooling, dehumidification, etc.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may
be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield.
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and press AUTO.
AUTO will achieve and maintain your desired
temperature by automatically adjusting the
blower speed and air distribution. Air
Conditioning (A/C) may be active during AUTO operation to
improve performance. AUTO mode is highly recommended
for efficiency. You can press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to turn
AUTO on. The AUTO indicator illuminates when AUTO is on.
Toggling this function will cause the system to switch
between manual mode and automatic modes
Ú page 48.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost button on
the touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to change the current
airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front
Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air
comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase.
Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for
best windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button,
the climate system will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost button on
the touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear
window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Driver And Passenger Up And Down
Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow button
on the touchscreen for warmer temperature
settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow on the
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to
toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator is illuminated when SYNC is on. SYNC
is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount
of air forced through the Climate Control
system. There are seven blower speeds
available.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch
to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using
either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the
buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control
knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and
the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
Mode Control
Change the airflow distribution mode by
pressing one of the Mode buttons on the
touchscreen. The airflow distribution mode can
be adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air
from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the
Climate Control ON/OFF.
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic
Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in US or Metric units
within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 107.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be
turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
Push the VR button. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP:
Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust
the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command
will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel
if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested
control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling system is
functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and
concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control system
when the vehicle is being stored for an extended period of
time, see
Ú page 269.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the air distribution box, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your
cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel.
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Console Features
The center console has a storage compartment located
underneath the armrest. The compartment contains a
12 Volt power outlet, and is also equipped with a USB port
featuring active charging, which will continue charging
your device up to 60 minutes after the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. The USB port also may be equipped with
an IPOD®/USB control
Ú page 50, or Apple CarPlay® and
Android Auto™
Ú page 144.
Center Console
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is
Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode), (MAX A/C) on,
and blower on high. Roll down
the windows for a minute to flush
out the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to achieve
comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C)
on and set the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Mix Mode) and turn (A/C) on
to keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If windshield
fogging starts to occur, move the
control to (Mix Mode).
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment
lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ILLUMINATED CUPHOLDERS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The front cupholders are equipped with a light ring that
illuminates the cupholders for the front passengers. The
light ring is controlled by the dimmer control
Ú page 43.
Light Ring In Front Cupholder
USB/AUX CONTROL
Located in the front storage area of the center console,
this feature allows an external USB device to be
connected to the audio system.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features,
if equipped
USB/AUX Ports
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen that
the device is not supported by the system.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a key symbol can be powered
when the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, while
the outlets labeled with a battery symbol are connected
directly to the battery and powered at all times.
These power outlets can also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit.
The front power outlet is located next to the storage area
on the integrated center stack of the instrument panel.
Power Outlet — Integrated Center Stack Front
NOTE:
The front integrated center stack power outlet can be
changed from switched ignition powered to battery
powered by moving the integrated center stack fuse
#12 in the Rear Power Distribution Center from fuse
location “IGN” to “B+”
Ú page 242.
1 — USB 1 Port
2 — AUX Jack
3 — USB 2 Port
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
In addition to the front center stack power outlet, there is
also a power outlet located in the center console to the left
of the media hub.
Power Outlet — Center Console
NOTE:
All accessories connected to these powered outlets
should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in
use to protect the battery against discharge.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Integrated Center
Stack
2 — #38 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 W
(13 Amp) at 12 Volts. If the 160 W (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use
(i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in
long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage.
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The window switches on the driver's door control all the
door windows.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door window can also be operated by using
the single window controls on the passenger door trim
panel. The window controls will operate only when the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
timing is programmable within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 107.
Automatic Window Features
The driver and, in some models, passenger power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window
switch to the second detent, release, and the window will
go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during the
Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
Anti-Pinch Protect
When closing the windows, this feature will detect any
obstruction in the path of the window and will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this
occurs.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open
or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence
and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the
windows open, partially close the windows to minimize the
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or
open any window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC
or ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
1 — Sunroof Close Switch
2 — Sunroof Open Switch
3 — Vent Switch
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within one
second, the sunroof and sunshade will open automatically
and stop at full open position.
Push the switch forward and release it within one second
and the sunroof will close automatically from any position.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
other movement of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the switch rearward, the sunroof and
sunshade will open and automatically stop at full open
position.
Push and hold the switch forward and the sunroof will
close from any position and stop at a full closed position.
Any release of the switch during open or close operation
will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof will remain in
a partially opened position until the switch is operated and
held again.
Venting The Sunroof
Push and release the Vent switch within one second and
the sunroof will open to the vent position. During Express
Vent operation, any other actuation of the sunroof
switches will stop the sunroof operation.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE —
I
F EQUIPPED
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of the
sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction
if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch
Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
SUNSHADE OPERATION
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear out any
debris that may have collected in the tracks.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
The power sunroof switch can remain active in Accessory
Delay for up to approximately 10 minutes after the
vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
This feature is programmable using the Uconnect system
Ú page 107.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or
ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury
or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat
belt properly and make sure all passengers are also
properly secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located underneath the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Reach under the hood, push the safety catch to the
left and lift the hood.
Hood Safety Catch Location
NOTE:
Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector must
be in PARK.
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are
not in motion and not in the lifted position.
CLOSING THE HOOD
In one continuous motion, pull down on the front edge of
the hood with moderate force until the angle is below the
crossover point (where the gas props are no longer
resisting) and let the hood continue to fall closed from its
own inertia.
TRUNK
OPENING THE TRUNK
The trunk may be opened in several ways:
Power trunk release button on the instrument panel
Trunk button on the key fob
Trunk Passive Entry button
Ú page 22
External release switch located on the underside of the
trunk lid overhang
NOTE:
The release feature will function only when the vehicle is
unlocked.
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the trunk open
symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that
the trunk is open. The odometer display will reappear once
the trunk is closed.
With the ignition in the OFF position, the trunk open
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Power Trunk Release Button
The trunk can be opened from inside the
vehicle using the power trunk release button
located on the instrument panel to the left of
the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The automatic transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate. For manual transmissions, the vehicle
must be in NEUTRAL.
Key Fob Trunk Release Button
Push the power trunk button on the key fob
twice within five seconds to release the trunk.
Passive Entry Button
Push the trunk Passive Entry button which is located on
the back of the trunk lid. With a valid Passive Entry key fob
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the trunk, push the Passive Entry
button to open the trunk.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
CLOSING THE TRUNK
With one or more hands placed on the outside trunk
surface push the trunk lid down until you hear the trunk
lock latch into place.
NOTE:
Before closing the trunk lid, make sure your key fob is not
inside the trunk area. The trunk will latch then automati-
cally unlock if the key fob is detected, not allowing the key
fob to be locked in the trunk area.
TRUNK SAFETY
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark
handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
Trunk Emergency Release
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Net — If Equipped
The rear cargo area may be equipped with a cargo net to
keep items secure while driving.
To attach the cargo net, the clips must be hooked through
the loops on both sides of the cargo area.
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either
by climbing into the trunk from outside, or through the
inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when
your vehicle is unattended. Once in the trunk, young
children may not be able to escape, even if they entered
through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children
can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 57
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (RPM x
1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages
Ú page 57.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal range
indicates that the engine cooling system is oper-
ating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits
of the normal operating range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door
is located.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when the
ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles,
or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument cluster
display is designed to display important information about
your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver
interactive display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how systems are
working and give you warnings when they are not. The
steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll
through the main menus and submenus. You can access
the specific information you want and make selections
and adjustments.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. It is
recommended to call an authorized dealer for service if
your vehicle overheats
Ú page 237.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H,”
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
3
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features an interactive
display which is located in the instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pushing the arrow buttons
located on the left side of the steering wheel. The
instrument cluster display menu items may consist of the
following:
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the
up or down arrow button allows you to
cycle through the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title area.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the
left or right arrow button allows you to
cycle through the submenu items of the Main menu item.
NOTE:
Holding the
up or down or left or
right arrow button will loop the user through the
currently selected menu or options presented on the
screen.
Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu
screen viewed within that main menu will be displayed.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer:
Pushing the
OK button changes units (mph or km/h).
For Screen Setup:
OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus.
Within each submenu layer, the
up and down
arrow buttons will allow the user to select the item of
interest.
Pushing the
OK button makes the selection and a
confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to
the first page of the submenu).
Pushing the
left arrow button will exit each
submenu layer and return to the main menu.
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
Speedometer Vehicle Info
Performance —
If Equipped
Driver Assist —
If Equipped
Fuel Economy Trip
Audio Messages Screen Setup
Diagnostics —
If Equipped
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 59
For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and Performance
Timers) — If Equipped:
Information is reset by pushing and holding the
OK
button.
ENGINE OIL LIFE RESET
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an
engine oil change indicator system.
The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the instrument cluster
display for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To turn
off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK or
arrow buttons. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to
the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display controls
for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the
right arrow button to access
the ”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the
OK button to reset oil life. If
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display
will update to show 100%. If conditions are not met a
pop-up message of "To reset oil life engine must be
off with ignition in run” will be displayed (for five
seconds), and the user will remain at the Oil Life
screen.
5. Push and release the
up or down arrow button
to return to previous main menu.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset.
If necessary, repeat this procedure.
PERFORMANCE SHIFT INDICATOR
(PSI) — I
F EQUIPPED
The PSI is enabled on vehicles with manual transmission,
or when a vehicle with automatic transmission is in
manual shift mode. The PSI provides the driver with a
visual indication within the instrument cluster display
when the driver configured gear shift point has been
reached and the driver is still accelerating. This indication
notifies the driver to change gear corresponding to the
configured RPMs in the head unit.
3
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
S
ELECTABLE MENU ITEMS
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the speedometer menu is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to toggle
units (km/h or mph) of the speedometer.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the “Vehicle Info” menu is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the
right or left
arrow button to scroll through the submenus items of
“Vehicle Info.” Follow the directional prompts to access or
reset any of the following “Vehicle Info” submenu items:
Tire Pressure Monitor
If tire pressure is
OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To XX”
is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire pressure
values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure value
of the low tire are displayed in a different color than the
other tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset
Ú page 168.
Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Trans Temp
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Oil Temp
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Oil Life
To reset the Oil Life, you must hold the
OK button. The
“Hold OK to Reset” instruction will be displayed at all
times, but the following conditions will need to be met in
order to reset Oil Life:
The vehicle must be off
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
If the conditions are met, holding the
OK button will reset
the gauge and the numeric display will return to 100%.
If the conditions are not met, a pop-up message will
display for 5 seconds, describing the required conditions,
and then the Oil Life screen will reappear.
Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Status — If Equipped
Displays the status of the All - Wheel Drive system.
Performance Features
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Performance menu is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push the
right or left arrow button to
enter the submenus.
The Performance Features include the following:
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) Timer
Best
Last
Recent
Reaction Timer
0-100 mph (0-160 km/h) Timer
Best
Last
Recent
Reaction Timer
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the
Performance Features is intended for off-highway or
track use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the limits
of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured
by the performance pages must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 61
1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer
Best
Last
Recent
Reaction Timer
1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer
Best
Last
Recent
Reaction Timer
Braking Distance
Distance
From Speed
Current G-Forces
Peak G-Forces
Lap Timer
Lap History
Will list the last five laps with the best lap high-
lighted in green.
Top Speed
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
system settings. The information displayed depends on
ACC system status.
Push the ACC ON/OFF button (located on the steering
wheel) until one of the following displays in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the instrument
cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
If the Driver Assist main menu is not selected, an ACC
pop-up message may display if any ACC activity occurs,
which may include any of the following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
Ú page 85.
Fuel Economy
Two submenu pages; one with Current Value
(instantaneous calculation of the fuel economy) displayed
and one without the Current Value displayed (toggle the
left or right arrow button to select one):
Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L).
Range To Empty (miles or km).
Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L).
The Max and Min values will correspond to the
particular engine requirements.
Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber color
and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
Hold the
OK button to reset average fuel economy
information.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Trip Menu item is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Toggle the
left or right arrow button to
select Trip A or Trip B. The Trip information will display the
following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG, L/100km or km/L) of Trip A or Trip B
since the last reset.
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel
since the last reset.
Hold the
OK button to reset feature information.
3
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio
This menu displays the Audio information of the currently
playing audio source (e.g. FM radio).
Messages
This feature shows the number of stored warning
messages, if any. Pushing the
right or left arrow
button will allow you to scroll through the stored
messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Screen Setup Menu displays in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the
OK button to enter the
submenus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to
change what information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information is
displayed.
NOTE:
Based upon equipment options and current vehicle
status, some of the features may not be available.
Current Gear
On
Off
Odometer
Show
Hide
Gear Display
Full
Single
Restore Defaults
Restore
Cancel
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at
a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
Upper Left
Compass -
If Equipped
Outside Temp Time
Range to Empty
Average (MPG,
L/100 km, or
km/L)
Current (MPG,
L/100 km, or
km/L)
Trip A Distance Trip B Distance None
Upper Right
Compass -
If Equipped
Outside Temp Time
Range to Empty
Average (MPG,
L/100 km, or
km/L)
Current (MPG,
L/100 km, or
km/L)
Trip A Distance Trip B Distance None
Center
Menu Title
Compass -
If Equipped
Outside Temp
Time Range to Empty
Average (MPG,
L/100 km, or
km/L)
Current (MPG,
L/100 km, or
km/L)
Trip A Distance Trip B Distance
Audio
Information
Digital Speed None
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 63
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system
Ú page 64.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be affected by load
reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical
loads are larger than the capability of the charging
system. The charging system is still functioning prop-
erly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB
ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec-
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar
devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12 Volts portable appliances like vacuum cleaners,
game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load
and Ignition Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips and
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated message
and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications
are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you
are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to
the information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active telltales will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay
on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on
during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
3
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking brake
is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is
a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It
does not show the degree of brake application.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or
passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the
ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on.
When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash
or remain on continuously and a chime will sound
Ú page 172.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 65
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS system
Ú page 83.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the
nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle
is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the
light remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals
are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing.
The light will come on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during
starting, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant
temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the
temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime
will sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to
cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn
it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle
the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service
Ú page 218.
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is
open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low
engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as
soon as possible, and contact an authorized
dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns
on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
3
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This may
occur with strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle
and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the light
turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to
drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
security system is arming, and then will flash
slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service
Ú page 85.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The light
will turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not
also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the ESC
system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out
with the engine running.
If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this warning light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light
come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2
gal (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a chime will
sound. The light will remain on until fuel is
added.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated
you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a
fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature
Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe
transmission damage or transmission failure.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 67
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the fuel
filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to
disengage the light. If the light does not turn
off, please see an authorized dealer.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems.
This warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine
start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving styles. In most situations,
the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All Wheel
Drive (AWD) system is not functioning properly
and that service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the Forward Collision Warning System.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
Ú page 167.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is
displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not
be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
previously, the display will show the indications
corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This
can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious
injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
3
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly
underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that
Forward Collision Warning is off.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without
Target Vehicle Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This will display the distance setting for the ACC
system when the system is engaged
Ú page 85.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Vehicle Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and the
vehicle in front is detected
Ú page 85.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on
Ú page 39.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on
Ú page 39.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 69
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash
independently and the corresponding exterior
turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indi-
cator flashes at a rapid rate.
ECO Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ECO mode is active.
Refer to the Drive modes Supplement for
further information.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is set to the desired speed
Ú page 84.
Sport Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Sport mode is
active.
Refer to the Drive Modes Supplement for
further information.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is ready, but not set
Ú page 84.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ACC has been
turned on, but is not set
Ú page 85.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With the
low beams activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the
high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward
you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass"
scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
damage to the emission control system. It could also
affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions tests can be
performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
3
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a connection
port to allow access to information related to the
performance of your emissions controls. Authorized
service technicians may need to access this information to
assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system
Ú page 106.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning
and is not on when the engine is running, and
that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may
not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this
test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is
not ready and you
should
not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illu-
minated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is
not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the previously mentioned test
routine may then indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II
connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including
personal information.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
71
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in
NEUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking
ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
I
F EQUIPPED
The gear selector must be in the PARK position before you
can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into
any driving gear.
Tip Start Feature — Automatic
Transmission
Place the ignition in the START position and release it as
the starter engages. The starter motor will automatically
disengage itself once engine is running. If the engine fails
to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10
seconds. If this occurs:
1. Place the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Wait 10 to 15 seconds.
3. Repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button — Manual
Transmission Only
1. Press and hold the clutch pedal while pushing and
holding the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. Release the ENGINE START/STOP button when the
engine starts. If the vehicle fails to start within 10
seconds, release the ENGINE START/STOP button,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in OFF position, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter
‘n Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
4
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
3. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, release the ENGINE START/STOP
button.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button — Automatic
Transmission Only
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP
button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine The Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button — Manual
Transmission Only
1. With the vehicle stopped, place the gear selector in
NEUTRAL, then push and release the ENGINE
START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
3. Place the gear selector in FIRST gear or REVERSE and
then apply the parking brake.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF posi-
tion.
If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position, the
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) and
the engine is not running.
If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short pushes in a row before the
engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will
remain in the ACC position until the vehicle is stopped,
placed in park and the button is pushed twice to the
OFF position.
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button — Automatic
Transmission Only
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or
three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed
above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
The ignition will remain in the ACC position until the
gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed
twice to the OFF position.
If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once, the instrument
cluster will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message
and the engine will remain running. Never leave a
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not
running) position and the transmission is in PARK, the
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with placing
the vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following
pages occur. It is a back up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the driver
shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not
blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster
display and on the gear selector. If the “P” indicator
is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
STARTING AND OPERATING 73
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the engine
will turn off and the ignition switch will change to ACC
position. After 30 minutes, the ignition switches to OFF
automatically, unless the driver turns the ignition switch
OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle
with the engine running, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “
AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to
Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed in
the instrument cluster. In these cases, the gear selector
must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage
ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P” will
be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed is
above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in PARK
by looking for the "P" in the instrument cluster display and
on the gear selector. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not
been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
crank cycle.
2. Place the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts. For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
ignition systems, press and hold the brake pedal
while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place
the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds
to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the “Extended
Park Starting” procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
into PARK. It is a back up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
WARNING!
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle
speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in
the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait
10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
4
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 STARTING AND OPERATING
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” and the vehicle has not experienced an
extended park condition as defined previously, it may be
flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than
10 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON/RUN
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(BELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
3.6L & 5.7L
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
installed at the factory are high-quality and
energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should
be consistent with anticipated climate and conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades
Ú page 278.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as an indication of difficulty. Please check your oil
level with the engine oil indicator often during the break in
period. Add oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
PARK or REVERSE (manual transmission only) position.
When the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch
is in the ON/RUN position, the Brake Warning Light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of
start can be dangerous if done improperly
Ú page 216.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
STARTING AND OPERATING 75
(Continued)
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the Brake Warning Light will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from
the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission, apply the parking brake before
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the
vehicle.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
Parking Brake Release
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the parking
brake, firmly push the parking brake pedal fully. To release
the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal a second
time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
Parking Brake
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the OFF position, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
4
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 STARTING AND OPERATING
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
6-SPEED MANUAL TRANSMISSION
NOTE:
During cold weather, you may experience increased effort
in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up. This is
normal.
Manual Gear Selector
SHIFTING
Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the
clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage
to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not fully
press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator pedal
when shifting.
Shift Pattern
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking
brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle
unattended without having the parking brake fully
applied. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an
incline.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,
or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear
on the clutch
Ú page 162.
Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor may
cause increased shift efforts, and may result in
damage to the clutch and transmission.
Do not rest your hand on the gear selector while
driving, as this may result in transmission synchro-
nizer damage.
Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear
wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Damage
to the transmission may occur.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
STARTING AND OPERATING 77
The 6-speed manual transmission has a spring that
centers the gear selector near THIRD and FOURTH gear.
This spring helps you know which gear you are in when you
are shifting. Be careful when shifting from FIRST to
SECOND or downshifting from SIXTH to FIFTH.
The spring will try to pull the gear selector toward THIRD
and FOURTH gear. Make sure you move the gear selector
into SECOND or FIFTH gear. If you let the gear selector
move in the direction of the pulling, you may end shifting
from FIRST to FOURTH or from SIXTH to THIRD gear.
You must always use FIRST gear (or REVERSE) when
starting from a standing position.
RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in recommended
shift speed chart.
Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively steady
speeds) may result in increased fuel economy.
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse
inhibitor system. Always press the clutch pedal fully to
the floor before shifting into REVERSE. When vehicle
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse
inhibitor activates to help prevent shifts into REVERSE.
When at a complete stop, you may notice lighter shift
efforts into REVERSE with the ignition switch in the ON
position (RUN position for Keyless Enter ‘n Go™), as
compared to the ignition LOCK position (OFF position
for Keyless Enter ‘n Go™). This is normal operation of
the transmission reverse inhibitor system.
Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain,
you may hear your transmission. This can be most
noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with
the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may
also be heard when driving at low engine RPM. Also,
this may be more noticeable when the transmission is
warm. This is a normal condition and is not an indica-
tion of a problem with your clutch or transmission.
1–4 SKIP SHIFT
In Auto Drive Mode, Default, or Street Drive Modes, there
are times when you must shift the transmission directly
from FIRST gear to FOURTH gear instead of from FIRST
gear to SECOND gear. This is to help you get the best
possible fuel economy from your vehicle.
This occurs when the engine coolant (antifreeze) is higher
than 106°F (41°C), vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph
(30 km/h) but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the
transmission is in FIRST gear, and the accelerator is at ¼
throttle or less.
After you shift the transmission to FOURTH gear, you can
press the clutch in and shift to another forward gear.
DOWNSHIFTING
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, downshift
to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep grade.
CAUTION!
Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete stop
before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so may
result in transmission damage.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION RECOMMENDED SHIFT
SPEEDS
Axle
Ratio
1-4 4-5 5-6
3.90
mph 20 37 48
km/h 32 59 77
WARNING!
Skipping more than one gear while downshifting, could
cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You could have
a collision.
CAUTION!
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting or
downshift at too high an engine speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
Do not downshift into FIRST gear when the vehicle is
moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), as you could
damage the engine and/or clutch.
4
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out
of PARK.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF position. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the ignition
is in the ACC position (even though the engine will be off).
Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition
is
OFF (not in ACC position) before exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the trans-
mission gear selector out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete
stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the
transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position is prop-
erly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some-
thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling
normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
WARNING!
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
STARTING AND OPERATING 79
BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are
applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine
must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
8-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear range is displayed both on the gear
selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear
range, push the lock button on the gear selector and move
the selector rearward or forward. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
pedal must be pressed. You must also press the brake
pedal to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; there-
fore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be some-
what abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision
shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual transmission gear (for example,
driver selects PARK while driving), the position indi-
cator will blink continuously until the selector is
returned to the proper position, or the requested shift
can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL (AutoStick) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward
(+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (beside the
DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission gear,
and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster
Ú page 82.
Automatic Transmission Gear Selector
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it
is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-) position (beside
the DRIVE position). In MANUAL (AutoStick) mode, the
transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster
(as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the gear selector to the right
(into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE,
and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting out of
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the
selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is espe-
cially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
4
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition OFF.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector and firmly move the selector all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it
is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmis-
sion gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is
moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop
before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmis-
sion gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated,
before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally
and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
STARTING AND OPERATING 81
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head
winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick
shift control to select a lower gear
Ú page 82. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is
warm. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE position)
enables full manual control of transmission shifting (also
known as AutoStick mode
Ú page 82. Toggling the gear
selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission may
not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A
message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of
the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions
may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates
the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at an authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that
you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible
convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition
to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that
limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing
Ú page 104.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle
Ú page 221.
4
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 STARTING AND OPERATING
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control of
the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
Operation
In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear selector (in the
MANUAL position), or the shift paddles to the MANUAL (M)
position (beside the DRIVE (D) position), or tap one of the
shift paddles on the steering wheel. Tapping the (-) shift
paddle to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the
transmission to the next lower gear, while tapping (+) to
enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear. The
current transmission gear will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Shift Paddles
NOTE:
Tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift
paddles (+/-) (if equipped), while the gear selector is in
DRIVE, will activate a temporary AutoStick mode.
Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the
transmission to the next lower gear, while tapping (+) to
enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear. The
current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster,
but the “M” will not be highlighted. The transmission
will revert back to normal operation (if the gear selector
remains in DRIVE) after a period of time, depending on
accelerator pedal activity.
In some models, the shift paddles may be disabled (or
re-enabled, as desired) using Drive Mode Set-Up,
accessed by selecting Performance Control.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver (using the
gear selector, or the shift paddles [if equipped]), unless an
engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will
remain in the selected gear until another upshift or
downshift is chosen, except as follows:
In temporary AutoStick mode (gear selector in DRIVE),
the transmission will automatically shift up when
maximum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is
fully pressed, the transmission will downshift when
possible. Lack of accelerator pedal activity will cause
the transmission to revert to automatic operation.
If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (gear selector in
MANUAL position), manual gear selection will be main-
tained until the gear selector is returned to DRIVE, or as
described in the following conditions. The transmission
will not upshift automatically at redline in this mode,
nor will downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal
is pressed to the floor.
The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to FIRST
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
1 — (–) Shift Paddle
2 — (+) Shift Paddle
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
STARTING AND OPERATING 83
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or SECOND
gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in
SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND gear can be
helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur and an indication
will display.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed and an indication will display.
Holding the (-) paddle pressed (if equipped), or holding
the gear selector in the (-) position, will downshift the
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current
speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle
(if equipped, and the gear selector is already in DRIVE)
until “D” is once again indicated in the instrument cluster.
You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE
CONTROL
Your vehicle is equipped with a SPORT Mode feature. This
mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast
driving. The engine, transmission (when equipped with
automatic transmission), and steering systems are all set
to their SPORT settings. SPORT Mode will provide
improved throttle response and modified shifting for an
enhanced driving experience, as well the greatest amount
of steering feel. This mode may be activated and
deactivated by pushing the SPORT button on the
instrument panel switch bank.
NOTE:
If equipped with a manual transmission, the 1 - 4 Skip
Shift feature is disabled in SPORT Mode.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off
four of the engine's eight cylinders during light load and
cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver
inputs or additional driving skills required. When the
system is active, an indication will display within the
instrument cluster “Fuel Economy” main menu screen.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full function-
ality after a battery disconnect.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system provides increased
vehicle response and ease of maneuverability. The system
adapts to different driving conditions. If the electric
steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from
providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer the
vehicle manually.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System
Ú page 107.
If the Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light is
displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” or the
“POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF – SERVICE SYSTEM”
message is displayed within the instrument cluster
display, this indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to the
dealer for service
Ú page 63.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering system is no longer opera-
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
4
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER
STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed on
the instrument cluster screen, they indicate that extreme
steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an
over temperature condition in the power steering system.
Once driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the
vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and message
turn off.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled,
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature
selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a time.
For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is enabled,
Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable, and vice
versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h),
depending on engine size and axle ratio.
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control.
“CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is on. To turn
the system off, push the on/off button a second time.
“CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accel
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always ensure the system
is OFF when you are not using it.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
STARTING AND OPERATING 85
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been
set, a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)”
will appear indicating what speed was set. A cruise
indicator lamp, along with set speed will also appear and
stay on in the instrument cluster when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to
pass as you would normally. When the pedal is released,
the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and down
hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button, or
normal brake pressure will deactivate the Cruise Control
system without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the OFF
position erases the set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise
Control without erasing the set speed from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Clutch pedal is pressed (manual transmission only)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise
Control function performs differently
Ú page 84.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need
to reset your Cruise Control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor
and a forward-facing camera designed to detect a vehicle
directly ahead of you to maintain a set speed.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
4
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled) will not
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be aware
of the feature selected
Ú page 284.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The Cruise Control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operate the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver involve-
ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead and,
most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion and death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehi-
cles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp; when
driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered,
slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
WARNING!
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
4 — Distance Decrease
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — RES/Resume
7 — SET (-)/Decel
8 — Distance Increase
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
STARTING AND OPERATING 87
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display shows the current ACC
system settings. The information it displays depends on
ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button until
one of the following appears in the instrument cluster
display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
cluster display.
The ACC screen may display if any of the following ACC
activities occur:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
The system will cancel when the vehicle speed drops
below 15 mph (24 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster displays
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
When the brakes are applied.
When the parking brake is applied.
When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL.
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum speed
range.
When the brakes are overheated.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster displays
“ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster displays
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled. To change between the different modes, push
the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to)
Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
ensure the system is off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will not
react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even
if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
4
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 STARTING AND OPERATING
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph
(32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below 20 mph
(32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can cause
the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs, the message “DRIVER OVERRIDE”
will display in the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while ACC is enabled, the system will not be controlling
the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied.
The parking brake is applied.
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed.
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The following condition will only cancel the ACC system:
The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES (resume)
button and remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The instrument cluster display will show the last set
speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph (0 km/h)
when ACC is active.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase speed by pushing the
SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing the SET (-)
button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button
is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET (-)
button, the new set speed will be the current speed of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic and
road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is
too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and death
or serious personal injury.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
STARTING AND OPERATING 89
When ACC Is Active:
NOTE:
When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
The ACC system applies the brake down to 15 mph
(24 km/h) when following a vehicle ahead.
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting will show in the instrument cluster
display.
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Setting Increase button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Setting Decrease button and release. Each time the
button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one
bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the instrument cluster display will show the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Vehicle
Light, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically
to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages
Ú page 87.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however,
the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system
applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that
its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the
set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display is a
warning for the driver to take action and does not neces-
sarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to
the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
4
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 STARTING AND OPERATING
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see an authorized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket
grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at an
authorized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW
Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal
system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need
to intervene. The following are examples of these types of
situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
STARTING AND OPERATING 91
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stability,
with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is out of
the curve, the system will resume your original set speed.
This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane
changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's
too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not
detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There
may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
4
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 STARTING AND OPERATING
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For
example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle
you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is
stopped in your lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
stationary object as it did not previously detect movement
from it. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up
(e.g. during a parking maneuver).
For limitations of this system and recommendations,
see
Ú page 95.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the previous ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will
turn on indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast to
continuous.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
STARTING AND OPERATING 93
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 4 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
2 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 5 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
4
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle:
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from within the Uconnect
system
Ú page 107.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to
indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and the detected obstacle.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch, located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the “ParkSense
Off” message for approximately five seconds. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the instrument cluster display will display the
“ParkSense Off” message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK
A
SSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message for five
seconds.
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None
Single 1/2 Second
Tone
(for rear center only)
Slow
(for rear center only)
Slow
(for rear center only)
Fast
(for rear center only)
Fast Continuous
Arc — Left Rear None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arc — Center Rear None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arc — Right Rear None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
STARTING AND OPERATING 95
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS” or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message for as long as the vehicle is
in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not
operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
appears in the instrument cluster display, make sure the
outer surface and the inside of the rear fascia/bumper is
clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the message
continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the instrument cluster display, see an
authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In
washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor
jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10
cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
Ensure that the rear fascia/bumper is free of snow, ice,
mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense or render the
system temporarily unavailable.
When you turn ParkSense off in DRIVE, the instrument
cluster will display "PARKSENSE OFF" for five seconds.
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains
off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the igni-
tion.
When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE posi-
tion and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio when it
is sounding an audio tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
Ensure the ParkSense system is off if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper.
Failure to do so can result in the system misinter-
preting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message to be shown in the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
4
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear license plate. The image will be displayed
in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds, this note will disappear.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable
modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 107.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature
and it is turned on, the rear camera image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE. However, this feature is canceled if the
forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
transmission is shifted into PARK, the vehicle's ignition is
placed in the OFF position, or by pressing the touchscreen
X button.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Camera
Delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited and the
last touchscreen appears again.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back
up path based on the steering wheel position. The active
guidelines will show separate zones that will help indicate
the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the
rear view camera image will continue to be displayed until
the transmission is shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s
ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the touchscreen X
button is pressed.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left
side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door. If the
gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure to use the correct
replacement cap for this vehicle.
1. Open the fuel filler door.
2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counterclockwise.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of The
Vehicle
Red
0 - 1 ft
(0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that
the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
STARTING AND OPERATING 97
Fuel Filler Cap
NOTE:
When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap tether in the
hook, located on the fuel filler door.
3. Fully insert the gasoline nozzle into the filler pipe.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle
to allow excess fuel to drain from the nozzle.
5. Remove gasoline nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and close
fuel filler door.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened prop-
erly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if
the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the
gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the instrument
cluster. If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly
and press the Trip Odometer button to turn off the
message. If the problem continues, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL.
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the
“Vehicle Certification Label”. This information should be
used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel tank
filler tube cap.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
4
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the
drivers side B-pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
Name of manufacturer
Month and year of manufacture
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Type of vehicle
Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
OVERLOADING
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels,
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and
rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle
is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle's
GVWR.
LOADING
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly
as possible. Stow all loose items securely before driving. If
weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have
exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within the
specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
NOTE:
Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the rear
of the driver's door for your vehicle's GVWR and GAWRs
Ú page 98.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your
vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles
used for trailer towing.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front or
rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if
either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
STARTING AND OPERATING 99
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR
Ú page 97.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully
loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the
trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle and
trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR
Ú page 97.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by
the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on
your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a swaying
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes
and/or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the
trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are commonly used to tow small and medium
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The
addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
4
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch
for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
Trailer towing with the 5.7L manual transmission, 6.4L and 6.2L Supercharged engine is not recommended.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW
3.6L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lb (454 kg) 100 lb (45 kg)
5.7L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lb (454 kg) 100 lb (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
STARTING AND OPERATING 101
(Continued)
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds
to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the Tire And Loading Information Placard for the
maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
WARNING!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the front
of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the tow
hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or
heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
severely side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in
front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo
that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can
occur that may be difficult for the driver to control.
You could lose control of your vehicle and have a
collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspen-
sion, chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
Max loading as defined on the Tire And Loading
Information Placard.
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
WARNING!
4
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 STARTING AND OPERATING
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled
Servicing” Ú page 223. When towing a trailer, never
exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing
while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. For proper
tire inflation procedures.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will
not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
For further information
Ú page 253.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do
not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lb (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an acci-
dent.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
STARTING AND OPERATING 103
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
(or any other device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connectors) before launching a boat into water.
Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing up
the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to
manually select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy
loading conditions will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup. This action will also provide better engine
braking.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
4
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 STARTING AND OPERATING
AutoStick
When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME)
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or
using a tow dolly) is
NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable
method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is
on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Information in this section will aid in safe controlled
launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving)
wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions
should be observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the
amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved
handling.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe engine, transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow,
wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
(Continued)
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow
standing water, consider the following Warnings and
Cautions before doing so.
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water
can wear away the road or path's surface and cause
your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore,
flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away
swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
4
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 4/4C/4C
NAV With 8.4-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect
Radio Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only
and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and
takes appropriate steps as needed. As always, if you
experience unusual behavior, contact an authorized
dealer immediately,
Ú page 280, or refer to your
Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for additional contact
information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features,
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or www.driveuco-
nnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about available
Uconnect software updates.
WARNING!
ONLY insert trusted media devices/components into
your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
contain malicious software, and if installed in your
vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, contact an authorized dealer immediately.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
MULTIMEDIA 107
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel. These buttons allow
you to access and change the Customer Programmable
Features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or beside
the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument
panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER control knob
located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the center of
the control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn off
the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap the
screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen
For the Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display and the Uconnect
4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Press the Apps button, then press the Settings button
on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In
this mode, the Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features.
NOTE:
All settings should be changed with the ignition in the
ON/RUN position.
Only one area of the touchscreen may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press one button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired mode, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting
is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the
X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right
side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
NOTE:
Availability of settings, setting names, and menu options
can vary depending on vehicle features, equipped
Uconnect system, and the currently installed software.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 MULTIMEDIA
Language
Display
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will display in the chosen
language.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available languages
are English, Français, and Español.
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The available
settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it
automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display
brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
MULTIMEDIA 109
Units
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting will allow you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five
seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts This setting will turn the weather alerts on or off.
Setting Name Description
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in the instrument
cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or
bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), “Power” (HP [US], HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque” (lb-ft or
Nm) units of measurement independently.
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
Clock
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system. The “Brief”
setting provides a shortened audio description from the system. The “Detailed” setting
provides the full audio description from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List and
provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the
Command List off.
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control
the time via the GPS location.
Time Format
This setting will allow you set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be off
for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format.
The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
MULTIMEDIA 111
Camera
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting
to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will decrease the
hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will
decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Setting Name Description
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features. Depending on the radio equipped in the vehicle,
the following Camera settings may be located in the Safety/Assistance settings.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of
REVERSE.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Assistance
When the Safety/Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ depending on the
features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options
related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert
sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view,
and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system
signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting will
deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime
when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an
audible chime and apply brake pressure when a collision is detected.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected and
can provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a
vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will
activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting
will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
MULTIMEDIA 113
Mirrors & Wipers
Electric Power Steering
This setting will adjust the Electric Power Steering modes. Setting options are “Normal”,
“Sport”, and “Comfort”.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of
REVERSE.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse This setting will tilt the mirrors when the vehicle is placed in REVERSE.
Setting Name Description
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse
This Setting will tilt the mirrors when the vehicle is placed in REVERSE. Setting options
are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights with Wipers
This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated. Setting options are
“On” and “Off”.
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn on or off the flashing of the lights when the Lock button
is pushed on the key fob. Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
MULTIMEDIA 115
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn on or off the flashing of the lights when the Lock button
is pushed on the key fob. Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off”
setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting
will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will
sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock/1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed
to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the
first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all doors on the first
push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™)
on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked
to the key fob.
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort
Key Off/Engine Off Options
When Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been
activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting
will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort
systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Easy Exit Seat
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut off.
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
When the Key Off/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shut off. These settings will only activate when the
ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut off.
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
MULTIMEDIA 117
Audio
Key Off/Engine Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”,
and “90 sec”.
Setting Name Description
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within the
vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right
of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume
will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”,
and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port.
The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smartphone.
The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The following settings are
“Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto
Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
Projection Manager This setting will activate your smartphone to project on the vehicle’s touchscreen.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
MULTIMEDIA 119
SiriusXM® Setup
Restore/Reset Settings
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. These settings can be used to skip specific radio
channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music
channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will display of
the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel Link is a
separate subscription.
When the Restore/Reset Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These
settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings/Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Reset App Drawer/Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from
the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 MULTIMEDIA
Clear Personal Data
System Information
When the Clear Personal Data button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays information related to your personal information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Clear Personal Data This setting will clear the personal data on the radio.
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
MULTIMEDIA 121
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
1 — Radio Button 5 — Controls Button
2 — Media Button 6 — Phone Button
3 — Climate Button 7 — Settings Button
4 — Apps Button
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press/Push the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media Mode and
access the radio functions and external audio sources Ú page 124.
Phone
Press/Push the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free phone
system Ú page 135.
Settings
Press/Push the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 107.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted selection on
the screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune a radio
station.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the MUTE button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system off. Push it
again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the VOLUME & On/Off button on the
faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the VOLUME & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to reset the
radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen from freezing.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
MULTIMEDIA 123
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily customized for your preference. Simply follow
these steps:
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Drag & Drop
1. Press the Apps button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected app to replace
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in PARK.
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using the system.
It contains instructions on how to use the system in a safe
and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. Doing so
can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety precautions. Failure to
do so may result in injury or property damage.
Become familiar with the Uconnect features and appli-
cations in this vehicle before you drive on the roadway
so using Uconnect will be more intuitive and will not
require prolonged viewing of the screen while you are
driving.
When driving, looking at the touchscreen should only
be done by a glance when safe to do so. If prolonged
viewing of the screen is required, choose a safe and
secure location where you can pull over and park safely
to do so.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. Failure to do
so may cause injury or damage to the product. See an
authorized dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a level
that still allows you to hear outside traffic and emer-
gency vehicles.
Feature Description
Controls — If Equipped
Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific features like heated seats and
steering wheel.
Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Mobile apps.
Climate
Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate control functions
Ú page 45.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
Your complete attention is always required while driving
to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Only use and
interact with the features and applications when it is
safe to do so. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 MULTIMEDIA
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated electronic
device. Do not let young children use the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play your
music or sound system at loud volumes. Exercise
caution when setting the volume on the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture away
from the system. Besides damage to the system,
moisture can cause electric shocks as with any
electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed dependent.
For your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the
touchscreen features while the vehicle is in motion.
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or sharp
objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), which could
scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on the
screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens cleaning
cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a
cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol or an
isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be
sure to follow the solvent manufacturer's precautions
and directions
Ú page 284.
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center and controls the volume and mode of
the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the right-hand control’s center button will make
the radio switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have
programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next track on the
selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing the
switch up twice will go forward two tracks. Pushing the
bottom switch goes to the beginning of the current track,
or the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
seconds after the current track begins to play. Double
pressing the bottom button switch will skip to the previous
track if it is after eight seconds into the current track.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
MULTIMEDIA 125
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter the
Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM,
can then be selected by pressing the corresponding
button in Radio Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the VOLUME & On/Off control knob to turn on and off
the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping.
Turning the VOLUME & On/Off control knob clockwise
increases the volume, and counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set
at the same volume level as last played.
Mute Button
Push the MUTE button to mute or unmute the system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio station
frequency. Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a
selection.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by pressing
the double arrow buttons on the touchscreen to the right
and left of the radio station display or by pushing the left
steering wheel audio control button up or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down
button to tune the radio to the next available station or
channel. During a Seek Up/Down function, if the radio
reaches the starting station after passing through the
entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up or
Seek Down button to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate. The radio
stops at the next available station or channel when the
button on the touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different frequency
bands at a slower rate.
1 — Radio Bands
2 — Preset Radio Stations
3 — View Next Preset Radio Stations
4 — Status Bar
5 — Browse
6 — Seek Down
7 — Tune
8 — Seek Up
9 — Audio Settings
10 — Bottom Menu Bar
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 MULTIMEDIA
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the radio
screen to directly tune to a desired radio station or
channel.
Press the available number button on the touchscreen to
begin selecting a desired station. Once a number has
been entered, any numbers that are no longer possible
(stations that cannot be reached) will become
deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Back button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been entered, press
“Ok”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and the system will
automatically tune to that station.
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear.
(Subscription or included SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial
required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel and wait for
the beep to say a command. See an example:
“
Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“
Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of what to
say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “
Help”. The system provides you with a list of
commands.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode —
If Equipped
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®
NOTE:
Some SiriusXM® features are not supported by all
SiriusXM® channels or content, for example song and
artist favorites, sport game notifications, tune start, and
others.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver
broadcasting technology to provide clear, coast-to-coast
radio content. SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or review
your SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s Manual
kit for more information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold separately
after the trial included with the new vehicle purchase.
If you decide to continue your service at the end of your
trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically
renew and bill at then-current rates until you call
SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM®
Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change. SiriusXM®
satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and
older in the 48 contiguous US and D.C. Our SiriusXM®
satellite service is also available in Canada and Puerto
Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite service area
and in AK. © 2022 SiriusXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and
all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
MULTIMEDIA 127
This functionality is only available for radios equipped with
a Satellite receiver. In order to receive satellite radio, the
vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might have to
change the vehicle’s position in order to receive a signal.
In most cases, the satellite radio does not receive a signal
in underground parking garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the radio
does not have the necessary subscription, the radio is
able to receive the Preview channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio subscription, US
residents visit https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or
call: 1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ or call:
1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID) located at
the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the SXM
button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is highlighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top of the
screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in the
center.
The Program Information is displayed at the bottom of
the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed below
the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by Direct
Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions common to
all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/Weather button, and
Favorite button functions are available in SiriusXM®
Mode.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
1 — Browse
2 — Replay
3 — Seek Down Button
4 — Direct Tune Button
5 — Seek Up Button
6 — Audio Settings Button
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 MULTIMEDIA
REPLAY
Replay provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The Play/Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause
the playing of live or rewound content at any time. Play can
be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button again on
the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the
content in steps of five seconds. Pressing the Rewind
button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds
rewinds the content. The radio begins playing the content
at the point at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen
forwards the content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding
of the content can only be done when the content is
previously rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live
content. A continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio begins
playing the content at the point at which the press is
released.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the
playing of live content.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
MULTIMEDIA 129
FAVORITES
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to activate
the favorites menu, which will time out within 20 seconds
in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X button.
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite artist or
song that is currently playing. The radio then uses this
information to alert you when either the favorite artist or
song is being played at any time by any of the SiriusXM®
Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be stored in
the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a favorite
artist, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen and
then the Favorite Artist button on the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a favorite
song, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen and
then the Favorite Song button on the touchscreen.
BROWSE IN SXM
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Browse Button
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to edit
Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump settings, along
with providing the SiriusXM® Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can exit
submenus to return to a parent menu by pressing the
Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When pressing
the All button, the following categories become available:
Channel List: Press the Channel List to display all the
SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can scroll the
Channel List by pressing the Up and Down arrows,
located on the right side of the screen. Scrolling can
also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Genre List: Press the Genre button on the touchscreen
to display a list of Genres. You can select any desired
Genre by pressing the Genre List. The radio tunes to a
channel with the content in the selected Genre.
Presets — If Equipped
Press the Presets button (if equipped) located at the left of
the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up and
Down arrows located at the right side of the screen.
Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL
knob as well.
1 — All Button
2 — Presets Button
3 — Favorites Button
4 — Game Zone Button
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 MULTIMEDIA
Preset Selection
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed
Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button on the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted
Preset. When selected, the Radio tunes to the station
stored in the Preset.
Deleting A Preset
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by
pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the Favorites
list and to configure the Alert Settings, along with
providing a list of Channels currently airing any of the
items in the Favorites list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up and
Down arrows located at the right side of the screen.
Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL
knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the screen.
Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete
all of the Favorites or press the Trash Can icon next to the
Favorite to be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the Favorites
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from
a visual alert or audible and visual alert when one of your
favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of the
Browse screen. This feature provides you with the ability to
select teams, edit the selection, and set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The On-Air list
provides a list of Channels currently airing any of the items
in the Selections list, and pressing any of the items in the
list tunes the radio to that channel.
Select Team — If Equipped
Press the Select Team button on the touchscreen to
activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen league
and a scroll list of all teams within the league will appear,
then you can select a team by pressing the corresponding
box. A check mark appears for all teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the screen.
Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete
all of the selections or press the Trash Can icon next to the
selection to be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen.
The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from “Alert
me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert upon score
update” or both when one or more of your selections is
airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from the
beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of
the 12 presets. This feature occurs the first time the
preset is selected during that current song.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
MULTIMEDIA 131
Setting Presets
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are
activated by pressing any of the Preset buttons, located at
the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save as a
preset, press and hold the numbered button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio
Modes.
A total of six presets will appear on the screen. You can
switch between the radio presets list by pressing the Arrow
button located in the upper right of the radio touchscreen.
PRESET FEATURES — IF EQUIPPED
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen provides a
means to edit the Presets List and is entered by pushing
the ENTER/BROWSE button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can scroll the
preset list by rotation of the TUNE/SCROLL knob or by
pressing the Up or Down Arrow key, located on the right of
the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed
Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button or the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted
Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station stored in the
Presets.
Deleting Presets
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by
pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen by pressing the X
button or the Back Arrow button when in the Browse
Presets screen.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main menu to
activate the Audio Settings screen.
The audio settings can also be accessed on the Radio
Mode screen by pressing the Audio button. You can return
to the Radio screen by pressing the X button.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between the front
speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers. Press the Front, Rear,
Left or Right button or press and drag the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or - button or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease each of the
equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at
the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”. This
alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation to vehicle speed.
Volume increases automatically as speed increases to compensate for normal road
noise.
Surround Sound
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction as in a
movie theatre or home theatre system.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and - buttons. This alters the AUX input
audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed
above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is connected
to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press “Off” to turn the
setting off.
Radio Off With Door
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or
passenger door is opened or until the “Radio Off Delay” selected time has expired.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
MULTIMEDIA 133
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source Select
button on the touchscreen and the desired mode button
on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the
Media sources available. When available, you can select
the Browse button on the touchscreen to be given these
options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the Info button
on the touchscreen for artist information on the current
song playing.
Types of Media Modes
USB MODE
Overview
USB Mode is entered by inserting a USB device into the
USB port, by selecting the USB button on the left side of
the touchscreen, or by selecting the Source Select/Select
Source button and then selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped).
BLUETOOTH® MODE
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode is
entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device, containing music,
to the Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be paired
to the Uconnect Phone to communicate with the Uconnect
system.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth® button
on the left side of the touchscreen or under the Source
Select/Select Source button (if equipped).
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Select Source
1 — Repeat
2 — Select Source
3 — Track Time
4 — Shuffle
5 — Info
6 — Browse
7 — Tracks
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 MULTIMEDIA
AUX MODE
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX device
using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port,
or by pressing the AUX button on the left side of the
touchscreen or under the Source Select button (if
equipped).
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the Auxiliary
device cable into the AUX port. If you insert an Auxiliary
device with the ignition and the radio on, the unit will
switch to AUX Mode and begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX device
using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port
or by pressing the AUX button on the left side of the
touchscreen, or under the Source Select button (if
equipped).
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output
from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the volume control
on the Auxiliary device is set too low, there will be insuffi-
cient audio signal for the radio unit to play the music on
the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB device.
Press and release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current
selection, or to return to the beginning of the previous
selection if the USB device is within the first three seconds
of the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek Up
button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the
Bluetooth® device. Press and release the Seek Down
button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the Bluetooth® device is within the
first second of the current selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the touchscreen
to display the browse window. In USB Mode, the left side
of the browse window displays a list of ways you can
browse through the contents of the USB device. If
supported by the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist,
Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired button on the
touchscreen on the left side of the screen. The center of
the browse window shows items and their sub-functions,
which can be scrolled through by pressing the Up and
Down buttons to the right. The TUNE/SCROLL knob can
also be used to scroll.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the touchscreen
to select the desired audio source: USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the touchscreen
to select the desired audio source: AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the touchscreen
to toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat button on
the touchscreen is highlighted when active. The Radio will
continue to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as
the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button again to
enter Repeat All. The radio will continue to play all the
current tracks, repeatedly, as long as the repeat function
is active. To cancel Repeat, press the Repeat button a
third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen
to play the selections on the USB device in random order
to provide an interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle
button on the touchscreen a second time to turn this
feature off.
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the Audio
button
Ú page 125.
Info
In USB Mode, press the Info button on the touchscreen to
display the current track information. Press the Info or X
button on the touchscreen a second time to cancel this
feature.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
MULTIMEDIA 135
Tracks
In USB Mode, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen
to display a pop-up with the Song List. The song currently
playing is indicated by an arrow and lines above and below
the song title. When in the Tracks List screen you can
rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob to highlight a track
(indicated by the line above and below the track name)
and then push the ENTER/BROWSE knob to start playing
that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device supports
this feature, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen
to display a pop-up with the Song List. The currently
playing song is indicated by a red arrow and lines above
and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while the
pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.
MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®, and
auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only available for
connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering wheel.
After the beep, say one of the following commands and
follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose
an artist:
“
Change source to Bluetooth®”
“
Change source to AUX”
“
Change source to USB”
“
Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest Hits”;
“
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB device.
Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist,
album, song, and genre information is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free,
in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to dial a
phone number with your mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mobile”
or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your incoming
SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward one of
18 predefined SMS messages to incoming calls/text
messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming Calls,”
“Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed Calls,” or “Show
Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number
(“Search for John Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks
displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Blue-
tooth® for messaging features to work properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect Phone.
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 MULTIMEDIA
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call 877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-387-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system's microphone
for private conversation.
The Phone feature is driven through your Bluetooth®
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Bluetooth® technology — the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station. Ensure you phone is
turned on with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to
the Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile phones or audio
devices are allowed to be linked to the system. Only one
linked (or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can
be used with the system at a time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel is
used to get into the Phone Mode and make
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls,
view phonebook, etc. When you push the
button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your signal to give
a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your steering
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you
are already in a call or want to make another
call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used to access
the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command
features if your vehicle is equipped.
Phone Operation
OPERATION
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
Phone and to navigate its menu structure. Voice
commands are required after most Uconnect Phone
prompts. There are two general methods for how Voice
Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith
mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
prompt.
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John Smith
mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
say each part of the command when you are asked for
it. For example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you
can break the compound command form into two voice
commands: “Search Contacts” and when asked, “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect Phone works
best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as
if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away
from you.
NATURAL SPEECH
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I would
like to”.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it
is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
MULTIMEDIA 137
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or
sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or
sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the system
requires more information from the user, it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pushing
the Voice Command button on the steering wheel.
HELP COMMAND
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following the
beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the
Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel and say a
command or say “Help”. All Phone sessions begin with a
push of the VR button or the Phone button.
CANCEL COMMAND
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone button on your
steering wheel when the system is listening for a
command and be returned to the main or previous menu.
PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
PHONE
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
To begin using your Uconnect Phone,
you must pair your compatible
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Mobile phone pairing is the process of
establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the
Uconnect system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to
reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone
compatibility information.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow these steps to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you
would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user enters
Phone Mode and no other device(s) have previ-
ously been paired. If the system has a phone previ-
ously paired, even if no phone is currently
connected with the system, this pop-up will not
appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is enabled.
Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to
search for Bluetooth® connections.
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up on
your touchscreen asking you to make sure the PIN on the
touchscreen matches the PIN from the pop-up on your
mobile phone.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to pair a
mobile phone, press the Phone Pairing or Settings
button from the Uconnect Phone main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button or the Add Device
button.
Search for available devices on your Blue-
tooth®-enabled mobile phone. When prompted
on the phone, select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress screen
while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system,
select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the
connection request from Uconnect.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting
“Yes” will make this phone the highest priority. This
phone will take precedence over other paired phones
within range and will connect to the Uconnect system
automatically when entering the vehicle.
Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth® audio
device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a
time. If “No” is selected, simply select “Uconnect”
from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
screen, and the Uconnect system will reconnect to
the Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the phone
priority is determined by the order in which it was paired.
The most recent phone paired will have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up on
your mobile phone for the Uconnect system to access your
“messages” and “contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will
sync your contacts with the Uconnect system.
You can also use the VR command “Show Paired Phones”
to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on
the radio.
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect system
may interfere with the Bluetooth® connection. If this
happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first
make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on
your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect
from the list of devices in your phone’s Bluetooth®
settings.
PAIR A BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
DEVICE
1. Press the Media button on the touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen to
display the Paired Audio Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with the system,
a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When prompted
on the device, confirm the PIN shown on the
Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process screen
while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite device. Selecting
“Yes” will make this device the highest priority. This
device will take precedence over other paired devices
within range.
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the device
priority is determined by the order in which it was paired.
The most recent device paired will have the higher priority.
You can also use the VR command “Show Paired Phones”
to bring up a list of paired audio devices.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
MULTIMEDIA 139
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest
priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within range. If
you need to choose a particular phone or audio device
follow these steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources button.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the particular
audio device. A pop-up menu will appear; press
“Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR
AUDIO DEVICE
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
button.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources button.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the
device name for a different phone or audio device
than the currently connected device or press the
preferred Connected Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete Device
button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
FAVORITE
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen, press
the Settings button located to the right of the device
name for a different phone or audio device than the
currently connected device or press the preferred
“Connected Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the touchscreen;
you will see the chosen device move to the top of the
list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC
PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE
PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has the
ability to download contact names and number entries
from the mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific Bluetooth®
Phones with Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature. Your mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking
for permission for the Uconnect system to access your
messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
your contacts with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com, for
supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook
Ú page 143.
Automatic download and update of a phonebook, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for
example, after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four numbers
per contact will be downloaded and updated every time
a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone.
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 MULTIMEDIA
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
able for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED
There are two ways you can add an entry to your favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press the
Favorites button on the touchscreen, and then press
one of the +Add Favorite Contact buttons that
appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and then
select the appropriate number. Press the Down Arrow
button or the Settings Gear button next to the
selected number to display the option’s pop-up. In the
pop-up, select “Add to Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to remove an
existing favorite.
TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from the
Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the Settings Gear
icon next to the contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for that
Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan. For
example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way
calling, this feature can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
Here are the phone options with Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
CALL CONTROLS
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
features:
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
1 — Answer
2 — End
3 — Mute/Unmute
4 — Transfer
5 — Join Calls
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
MULTIMEDIA 141
KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to
enter the number and press “Dial/Call”.
RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent Calls
button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your steering wheel
and perform the operation. For example, say “Show my
incoming calls”.
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system.
Push the Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen.
You can also press the Caller ID box to place the current
call on hold or answer the incoming call.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile
phone. Push the Phone button on the steering wheel,
press the Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer
the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect system in
the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on
the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed
calls and text messages while Do Not Disturb is active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call, or both when declining an incoming call
and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, “Conference Call” can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being
interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhone® devices.
Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® Message Access
Profile (MAP).
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 MULTIMEDIA
PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold button
on the Phone main screen.
MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT
CALL IS IN PROGRESS
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold button
on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from the
keypad (if supported by your mobile phone), recent calls,
SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks.
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the Swap Calls button on the phone main screen.
Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle between the
active and held phone call.
JOIN CALLS
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the Phone
main screen to combine all calls into a conference call.
CALL TERMINATION
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the End Call
button on the touchscreen or the Phone End button on the
steering wheel. Only the active call(s) will be terminated
and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new
active call.
REDIAL
Push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
that was dialed from your mobile phone.
CALL CONTINUATION
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until
the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth®
connection. It is recommended to press the Transfer
button on the touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
PHONE
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without terminating
the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your connected
mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press
the Transfer button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
VOICE COMMAND
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away
from you
Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during a
voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
MULTIMEDIA 143
Even though the system is designed for many languages
and accents, the system may not always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names in your
Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar. You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0”
(zero).
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
combinations may not be supported.
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to
a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the
Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to say a
command. Here are some examples:
“
Call John Smith”
“
Dial 123 456 7890”
“
Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
“
Call back” (call previously answered incoming phone
number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command, push
the Phone button and say “
Call”, then pronounce the
name
exactly as it appears in your phonebook. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “
Call
John Smith
work”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce
incoming text messages. Push
the VR button or Phone button and say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an incoming text
message. (Must have compatible mobile phone
paired to Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has been
read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, re-
peat one of the predefined messages and follow the
system prompts.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided table.
Otherwise, the system will not transpose the message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the full
implementation of the
Message Access Profile (MAP) to
take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading
incoming
text messages only. For further information on how to
enable this feature on your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your
iPhone® “User Manual”.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You
have full responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the Uconnect features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20, 25,
30, 45, 60>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5 <or
10, 15, 20, 25,
30, 45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 MULTIMEDIA
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri® Eyes
Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected to your
vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use your voice to send
text messages, select media, place phone calls and much
more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what
you mean and responds back to confirm your requests.
The system is designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform
useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep, you can ask Siri to play podcasts
and music, get directions, read text messages, and many
other useful requests.
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK
Mobile phones may lose connection to the Uconnect
Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally
be re-established by restarting the mobile phone. Your
mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth®
ON Mode.
POWER-UP
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system
Ú page 284.
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® —
IF EQUIPPED
ANDROID AUTO™
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Android Auto™ is a feature of your
Uconnect system, and your Android™
6.0 or higher powered smartphone
with a data plan, that allows you to
project your smartphone and a number
of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto™ brings you useful information, and
organizes it into simple cards that appear just when they
are needed. Android Auto™ can be used with speech
technology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs and
buttons on your radio faceplate, and the radio display’s
touchscreen to control many of your apps. To use Android
Auto™, perform the following procedure:
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™ features may
or may not be available in every region and/or language.
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the Google
Play store on your Android™-powered smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™-powered smartphone to one
of the media USB ports in your vehicle. If the Android
Auto™ app was not downloaded, the first time you
plug your device in the app begins to download.
Your vehicle should be in PARK the first time you use
the app.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable that came
with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work.
Android Auto™ And LTE Data Coverage
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may use cellular data
and your cellular coverage is shown in the upper right
corner of the radio screen. Data plan rates apply.
3. Once the device is connected and recognized, the
Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes to
the Android Auto™ icon.
NOTE:
Android Auto™ is set to launch immediately once a
compatible device is connected. You can also launch it by
pressing the Android Auto™ icon on the touchscreen.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
MULTIMEDIA 145
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your Uconnect
system, the following features can be utilized using your
smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
YouTube Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for music
Hands-free calling and texting for communication
Various compatible apps
Maps
Push and hold the Voice Recognition (VR)
button on the steering wheel until the beep or
tap the Microphone icon to ask Google to take
you to a desired destination by voice. You can
also touch the Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access
other navigation apps.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™ provides
voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
For further information, refer to www.android.com/auto/
(US) or https://www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/
(Canada).
For further information on the navigation function, please
refer to https://support.google.com/android or https://
support.google.com/androidauto/.
Music
Android Auto™ allows you to access and
stream your favorite music with apps like
YouTube Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify.
Using your smartphone’s data plan, you can
stream endless music on the road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up on your
smartphone prior to using Android Auto™ for them to work
with Android Auto™.
NOTE:
To see the track details for the music playing through
Android Auto™, select the Uconnect system’s media
screen.
For further information, refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto.
Communication
With Android Auto™ connected, push and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to activate
voice recognition specific to Android Auto™.
This allows you to send and reply to text
messages, have incoming text messages read out loud,
and place and receive hands-free calls.
Apps
The Android Auto™ App displays all the compatible apps
that are available to use with Android Auto™, every time it
is launched. You must have the compatible app
downloaded, and you must be signed in to the app through
your mobile device for it to work with Android Auto™.
Refer to https://play.google.com/store/apps/ to see the
latest list of available apps for Android Auto™.
Android Auto™ Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™ features may
or may not be available in every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to interact with
its best-in-class speech technology through your vehicle’s
voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data
plan to project your Android™-powered smartphone and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen.
Connect your Android™ 6.0 or higher to one of the media
USB ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and
press the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces your
Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto™.
Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or
press and hold the Microphone icon within Android Auto™,
to activate its VR, which recognizes natural voice
commands, to use a list of your smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™ on your car display, you’ll need
an Android™ phone running Android™ 6.0 or higher, an
active data plan, and the Android Auto™ app.
To wirelessly use Android Auto™ on your car display,
you need a compatible Android™ smartphone with an
active data plan. You can check which smartphones
are compatible at g.co/androidauto/requirements.
Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 MULTIMEDIA
APPLE CARPLAY®
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple
CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure
way to use your iPhone® in the car, and
stay focused on the road. Use your
Uconnect Touchscreen display, the
vehicle's knobs and controls, and your
voice with Siri to get access to Apple Music®, Maps,
Messages, and more.
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay® features may
or may not be available in every region and/or language.
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are using iPhone®
5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings, ensure your
iPhone® is unlocked for the very first connection only, and
then use the following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media USB
ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable that
came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not
work.
2. Once the device is connected and recognized, the
Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes to
the Apple CarPlay® Icon.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is set to launch immediately. You can also
launch it by pressing the Apple CarPlay® icon on the
touchscreen.
Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular data is
turned on, and that you are in an area with cellular
coverage. Your data and cellular coverage is shown on the
left side of the radio screen. Data plan rates apply.
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your Uconnect
system, the following features can be utilized using your
iPhone® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold the VR
button on the steering wheel to activate a Siri
voice recognition session. You can also press
and hold the Home button within Apple
CarPlay® to start talking to Siri. This allows you to make
calls or listen to voicemail as you normally would using Siri
on your iPhone®.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the steering
wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR session, not a Siri
session, and it will not function with Apple CarPlay®.
Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access all your
artists, playlists, and music from iTunes® or
any third party application installed on your
device. Using your iPhone® data plan, you can
also use select third party audio apps including music,
news, sports, podcasts, and more.
1 — LTE Data Coverage
2 — Apple CarPlay® Icon
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
MULTIMEDIA 147
Messages
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel to activate a Siri voice recognition
session. Apple CarPlay® allows you to use Siri
to send or reply to text messages. Siri can also
read incoming text messages, but drivers will not be able
to read messages, as everything is done via voice.
Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel until the beep or tap the Microphone
icon to ask Apple® Siri to take you to a desired
destination by voice. You can also touch the
Navigation icon in Apple CarPlay® to access
Apple® Maps.
Apps
The Apple CarPlay® App plays all compatible apps that are
available to use, every time it is launched. You must have
the compatible app downloaded, and you must be signed
in to the app through your mobile device for it to work with
Apple CarPlay®.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ (US) or
https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/ (Canada) to see
the latest list of available apps for Apple CarPlay®.
Apple CarPlay® Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay® features may not be
available in every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to interact
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
iPhone® and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning
cable, and press the new Apple CarPlay® icon that
replaces your Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin
Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel, or press and hold the Home button within
Apple CarPlay®, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural
voice commands to use a list of your iPhone® features:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps — If Equipped
Additional Apps — If Equipped
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc. iPhone® is
a trademark of Apple® Inc., registered in the US and other
countries. Apple® terms of use and privacy statements
apply.
ANDROID AUTO™ AND APPLE
C
ARPLAY® TIPS AND TRICKS
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic Bluetooth®
Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® for
the first time and undergoing the setup procedure, the
smartphone pairs to the Uconnect system via Bluetooth®
without any setup required every time it is within range, if
Bluetooth® is turned on.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® uses a USB connection while Android
Auto™ uses both USB and Bluetooth® connections to
function. The connected device is unavailable to other
devices when connected using Android Auto™ or Apple
CarPlay®.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect System —
If Equipped
It is possible to have multiple devices connected to the
Uconnect system. For example, if using Android Auto™/
Apple CarPlay®, the connected device will be used to
place hands-free phone calls or send hands-free text
messages. However, another device can also be paired to
the Uconnect system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio source,
so the passenger can stream music.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® and Android Auto™ can only be launched
from the front and center console USB ports.
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 MULTIMEDIA
PERFORMANCE PAGES
Performance Pages is an application that provides a
display for performance indicators, as received from the
instrument cluster, that will help you gain familiarity with
the capabilities of your vehicle in real time.
To access the Performance Pages, press the Apps button
on the touchscreen then press the Performance Pages
button on the touchscreen. Press the desired button on
the touchscreen to access that specific Performance
Page.
The Performance Pages include the following:
Home
Timers
Gauges
G-Force
Engine
Dyno
If a USB drive is installed in the media hub, press the
Camera icon on the top right of the touchscreen when
using Performance Pages. A screen shot of the page will
be taken and saved onto the USB.
Screenshot Camera Button
The following describes each feature and its operation:
HOME
Performance Pages — Home
When Home is selected, a series of widgets (gauges) can
be customized by the user. Follow these steps to change a
widget. Either press directly on the widget you want to
change, or:
1. Press the Settings button (gear icon) on the
touchscreen to access the main menu for the
widgets.
2. Select one the following options from the menu:
Set Widget: Top Left
Set Widget: Top Right
Set Widget: Bottom Left
Set Widget: Bottom Right
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the
Performance Pages is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the limits
of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured
by the Performance Pages must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
MULTIMEDIA 149
3. After selecting a widget location, select the gauge to
display:
Gauge: Oil Temp
Gauge: Oil Pressure
Gauge: Coolant Temp
Gauge: Battery Voltage
Gauge: Trans Temp — If Equipped with an Auto-
matic Transmission
Gauge: Boost Pressure — If Equipped
Gauge: Air/Fuel Ratio — If Equipped
Gauge: I/C Coolant Temp — If Equipped
Gauge: Intake Air Temp
Gauge: Engine Torque
Gauge: Engine Power
Gauge: G-Force
Gauge: Steering Angle
Gauge: Current Gear
Gauge: Current Speed
Timer: 0–60 mph (0–100 km/h)
Timer: 0–100 mph (0–160 km/h)
Timer: 60 ft (20 m)
Timer: 330 ft (100 m)
Timer: 1/8 Mile (200 m)
Timer: 1000 ft (300 m)
Timer: 1/4 Mile (400 m)
Timer: Braking Distance
Timer: Reaction Time
Historical Data
The Historical Data feature allows you to view information
about your vehicle such as the VIN, miles on the odometer,
longitude and latitude coordinates, and more.
To activate the Historical Data feature on your
touchscreen, follow these steps:
1. Select the Home page tab within Performance
Pages. Then, press the settings icon (gear icon) in
the upper right hand corner of the touchscreen.
Home Page Settings
2. Towards the bottom of the screen, a checkbox will
appear next to “Include historical data in
screenshot.” Click the box to signify that this feature
will be on.
Historical Data
NOTE:
Once the checkbox is selected, the bottom bar of the
screen will be replaced with the historical data from your
vehicle present at the time the screenshot icon was
pressed.
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 MULTIMEDIA
Historical Data
3. To take a screenshot of the historical data, make sure
a USB device is plugged into the vehicle. Next, click
the Camera icon located in the top right corner of the
touchscreen. The historical data image file will be
saved to the USB drive.
Historical Data Camera Icon
TIMERS
Performance Pages — Timers
When the Timers Page is selected, you will be able to
select the Drag or Accel & Braking tabs. The following will
be displayed:
Recent
The most recent successful run of performance timers.
If a run does not complete within the timers limit, or is
aborted, the values shown will revert to the most recent
valid run.
Last
The last recorded successful run of performance
timers.
Best
The best recorded run of performance timers, except
for braking data.
Save
Pressing the Save button will let you save the visible
page, Recent/Last/Best. Any saved run over 10 will
overwrite the last saved run for Uconnect system
storage.
NOTE:
Pressing the Camera icon in the upper right corner of the
screen at any time will save a screenshot of the screen
currently being viewed to the connected USB device.
1 — Outside Temperature
2 — Date
3 — Odometer
4 — Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
5 — Longitude And Latitude Coordinates
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
MULTIMEDIA 151
Timers — Save
With a USB jump drive installed, press the USB button
to save to the jump drive.
Press the Uconnect button to save the runs to the
Owner’s web page.
NOTE:
Uconnect option will be grayed out or missing if the vehicle
does not have a valid Uconnect account associated with it.
Press the Cancel button to return to the Timers page.
The tabs on the Timers page contain the timers listed:
Reaction Time
Measures the driver's reaction time for launching the
vehicle against a simulated drag strip timing light
(behavior modeled after 500 Sportsman Tree)
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
Drag timers (RT, 60 ft [20 m], 330 ft [100 m], 1/8 mile
[200 m], 1000 ft [300 m], and 1/4 mile [400 m]).
NOTE:
Accel & Braking timers (0-60 mph [0-100 km/h],
0-100 mph [0-160 km/h], Brake from mph [km/h], and
Brake Distance ft [meters]).
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from
0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h).
0-100 mph (0-160 km/h)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from
0 to 100 mph (0 to 160 km/h).
60 ft (20 m) ET
Displays the time it takes the vehicle to go
60 feet (20 m).
330 ft (100 m) ET
Displays the time it takes the vehicle to go
330 feet (100 m).
⅛ Mile (200 m) ET
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go
⅛ mile (200 m).
⅛ Mile (200 m) mph
Displays the vehicle speed at the time ⅛ mile (200 m)
was reached.
1000 ft (300 m) ET
Displays the time it takes the vehicle to go 1000 ft
(300 m).
¼ Mile (400 m) ET
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go ¼ mile
(400 m).
¼ Mile (400 m) mph
Displays the speed the vehicle was at when ¼ mile
(400 m) was reached.
Brake Distance ft (meters)
Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a
complete stop.
NOTE:
The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
pedal is released or the parking brake is engaged, before
the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
Brake from mph (km/h)
Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the
brake pedal is pressed.
NOTE:
Brake Distance and Speed timers only display "ready"
when the vehicle is traveling at greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 MULTIMEDIA
GAUGES
Performance Pages — Gauges
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
Battery Voltage
Shows actual battery voltage.
Trans Oil Temp — If Equipped with an Automatic
Transmission
Shows actual transmission oil temperature.
Boost Pressure — If Equipped
Shows actual boost pressure.
Air Fuel Ratio — If Equipped
Shows current air fuel ratio.
I/C Coolant Temp — If Equipped
Shows actual I/C Coolant temperature.
Intake Air Temp
Shows actual air intake temperature.
If a gauge is selected, the Gauge Detail View page will
appear on the screen. This page shows gauge values for
the previous two minutes on the selected gauge.
Pressing the Left and Right arrows will cycle through the
details for each of the gauges. Pressing the minimize
button above the graph will return to the gauge menu.
Gauge Detail View Page
G-FORCE
Performance Pages — G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force values
as well as steering angle.
When G-Force is selected, the following features will be
available:
Vehicle Speed:
Measures the current speed of the vehicle in either
mph or km/h, starting at zero with no maximum value.
Front G-Force:
Measures the peak braking force on the front of the
vehicle.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
MULTIMEDIA 153
Right G-Force:
Measures the peak force on the right side of the
vehicle.
Left G-Force:
Measures the peak force on the left side of the vehicle.
Rear G-Force:
Measures the peak acceleration force on the rear of
the vehicle.
NOTE:
Front, Right, Left, and Rear G-Forces are all peak values.
These readings can be reset by clearing peak G-Force on
the instrument cluster.
Steering Wheel Angle
Steering Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor
to measure the degree of the steering wheel relative to
zero (straight ahead) reference angle. The zero degree
reference angle measurement indicates a steering
wheel straight ahead position.
The friction circle display shows instantaneous G-Force as
a highlight and previous G-Force as dots within the circle.
The system records previous G-Force for three minutes. If
there are multiple samples at a given point, the color of
the dot will darken from blue to red. Vectors more frequent
will show in red; infrequent vectors will show in blue.
ENGINE
Performance Pages — Engine
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
Vehicle Speed
Shows the actual vehicle speed.
Engine Power
Shows the instantaneous power.
Engine Torque
Shows the instantaneous torque.
Oil Pressure (6.4L Only) — If Equipped
Shows the actual engine oil pressure.
Boost Pressure (6.2L Only) — If Equipped
Shows the actual boost pressure.
Gear (Automatic Transmission Only)
Shows the current (or pending) operating gear of the
vehicle.
DYNAMOMETER (DYNO)
Performance Pages — Dyno
The system will start drawing graphs for Power and Torque
(top chart) and Engine Speed (bottom chart). The graph
will fill to the right side of the page (based on History time
selected). Once the right side of the page is reached, the
graph will scroll with the right side always being the most
recent recorded sample.
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 MULTIMEDIA
The following options can be selected:
Pressing the STOP button will freeze the graph.
Selecting Play will clear the graph and restart the
process over.
Press the + or - buttons to change the history of the
graph. The selectable options are “30”, “60”, “90”, and
“120” seconds. The graph will expand or constrict
depending on the setting selected.
Select the “Gear” display setting to turn the graph gear
markers on and off for automatic transmission vehicles
only.
NOTE:
The Gear on/off feature will only display if your vehicle is
equipped with an Automatic Transmission.
DODGE DRIVE MODES — IF EQUIPPED
PERFORMANCE CONTROL —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Performance Control
feature which allows for coordinating the operation of
various vehicle systems depending upon the type of
driving behavior desired. The Performance Control feature
is controlled through the Uconnect system and may be
accessed by performing any of the following:
Pushing the Super Track Pack button on the instru-
ment panel switch bank.
Selecting “Performance Control” from the Apps menu.
Selecting “Performance Control” from within the
Performance Pages menu.
You will be able to enable, disable, and customize the
functionality of the Launch Control and Performance
Control Set-Up features within Performance Control.
To access information about the functionality of these
features through the Uconnect system, press the Info
button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
Dodge vehicles equipped with a 6.4L engine, except for
R/T Scat Pack 1320 6.4L non-widebody vehicles, will use
SRT Drive Modes rather than the Dodge Performance
Control Pages. Please refer to the following sections for
further information on the SRT Drive Modes.
Drive Mode Set-Up
Performance Control Set-Up
Pressing the Drive Mode Set-Up button on the
touchscreen within the Performance Control screen
indicates the real-time status of the various systems.
Pressing the Sport Mode Set-Up, Drag Mode Set-Up
(1320 only), or Default Mode Set-Up buttons on the
touchscreen allows the driver to configure their individual
performance control and see how those configurations
affect the performance of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Not all of the options listed in this manual are available on
every vehicle. Here is a chart with all available Perfor-
mance Control vehicle configurations:
Available Mode Configurations
Refer to the Sport and Default Modes for their detailed
operation.
NOTE:
These settings will remain in effect when using the Launch
Control feature.
Engine If Manual Transmission
Engine/Transmission If Auto Transmission
Steering X
Paddle Shifters If Auto Transmission
Traction Control X
Suspension If Adaptive Suspension
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
MULTIMEDIA 155
Default Mode
Default Mode
The vehicle will always start in Default Mode. This mode is
for typical driving conditions. While in Default Mode, the
Engine, Transmission and Traction will operate in their
Normal settings and cannot be changed. The Steering
Assist may be configured to “Normal”, “Sport”, or
“Comfort” by pressing the corresponding button on the
touchscreen. The Paddle Shifters (if equipped) may be
enabled or disabled while in this mode.
Default Mode Set-Up
Launch Control
Launch Control
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system that
is designed to allow the driver to achieve quick, consistent
vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is a
form of traction control that manages tire slip while
launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use
during race events on a closed course where consistent
quarter-mile and 0-to-60 times are desired. The system is
not intended to compensate for lack of driver experience
or familiarity with the race track. Use of this feature in low
traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions may result in
excess wheel slip outside this system’s control resulting in
an aborted launch.
WARNING!
Launch Control is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. It is recommended that this feature be used
in a controlled environment, and within the limits of the
law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the
performance pages must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Launch Control should not be used on public roads.
Always check track conditions and the surrounding
area.
Launch Control is not available for the first 500 miles
(805 km) of the vehicle’s life.
Launch Control should only be used when the engine
and transmission are at operating temperature.
Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved
road surfaces only. Use on slippery or loose surfaces
may cause damage to vehicle components and is not
recommended.
Launch Control is not available in ESC Full Off Mode.
Sport Mode
Sport Mode
Sport Mode is a configuration setup for typical enthusiast
driving. The Transmission and Steering are both set to
their Sport settings. The steering wheel Paddle switches
are enabled. Traction Control defaults to Normal. Any of
these four settings may be changed to the driver’s
preferences by pressing the buttons on the touchscreen.
Push the Sport button on the instrument panel switch
bank to put the vehicle in Sport Mode and activate these
settings. The customized settings will only be active when
the Sport button is active.
Sport Mode Set-Up
Possible Performance Control configurations are listed
with accompanying descriptions. The information
contained in the following list can also be accessed from
within the mode Set-Up menus. To access the information,
press the Info button on the touchscreen from the mode
Set-Up menu, and use the Left/Right arrows to toggle
through available descriptions. The title for each system in
the Set-Up menu can be pressed, which provides the
descriptions for each function of that system.
ENGINE/TRANS (IF EQUIPPED WITH
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION)
Engine/Trans
SPORT
Press the Sport button on the touchscreen for
improved throttle response and modified shifting for an
enhanced driving experience.
NORMAL
Press the Normal button on the touchscreen for a
balance of throttle response, shift comfort and
economy for normal driving.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
MULTIMEDIA 157
PADDLE SHIFTERS — IF EQUIPPED WITH
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Paddle Shifters – Automatic Transmission
ON
Press the On button on the touchscreen to enable
steering wheel Paddle Shifters.
OFF
Press the Off button on the touchscreen to disable
steering wheel Paddle Shifters.
TRACTION
Traction Control
SPORT
Press the Sport button on the touchscreen to turn off
traction control and reduce stability control.
NORMAL
Press the Normal button on the touchscreen to provide
full traction control and full stability control.
STEERING — IF EQUIPPED
Steering
SPORT
Press the Sport button on the touchscreen to provide
an increased amount of steering feel, requiring a
higher amount of steering effort.
NORMAL
Press the Normal button on the touchscreen to provide
a balanced steering feel and steering effort. This is also
your vehicle’s preset steering setting.
COMFORT
Press the Comfort button on the touchscreen to
provide a lower steering effort.
5
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by repositioning the mobile phone within the vehicle. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily improve from
repositioning the mobile phone, it is recommended that
the volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or further from
the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the
wireless radio
Ú page 284.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
159
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances vehicle
control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of the ABS activating.
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may continue
to hear for a short time after the stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may
result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long
as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio transmit-
ting equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
WARNING!
6
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 SAFETY
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill
Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System (TCS).
These systems work together to enhance both vehicle
stability and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert
Braking (RAB) and Rain Brake Support (RBS).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing
the rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit
of the system, you must apply continuous braking
pressure during the stopping sequence (do not “pump”
the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is
released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque
between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip
of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring
the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the
vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of
the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off” mode
(if equipped). For a complete explanation of the available
ESC modes, see
Ú page 161.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The
capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel
lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel
lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
SAFETY 161
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for
oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the
previously mentioned conditions. Engine power may also
be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer
or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located in
the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC
system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally
allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the ESC
OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate.
To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF
button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabil-
ities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain
your vehicle, may change the handling characteris-
tics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the
performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance that
reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of ESC
(except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS
section) has been disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode,
the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled,
and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
system is reduced.
6
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 SAFETY
(Continued)
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the push
and release of the switch will toggle the ESC modes.
Multiple attempts may be required to return to "ESC
On" mode.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
If Equipped — "ESC Sport" and "ESC Track" are ESC
“Partial Off” mode(s).
Full Off – If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this
mode, TCS and ESC features are turned off. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the ESC OFF button for five
seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC
on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
in the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON mode. It should go
out with the engine running. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system
becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates that the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in a reduced
mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the
ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON position, the
ESC system will be on even if it was turned off
previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop
while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake
pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as
normal.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduc-
tion and stability features are disabled. Therefore,
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system
is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver,
the ESC system will not engage to assist in main-
taining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
WARNING!
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
SAFETY 163
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, see
Ú page 107.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet conditions.
It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure
to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It
functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI
speed. When RBS is active, there is no notification to the
driver and no driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when
an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring
how fast the throttle is released by the driver. The
Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) will prepare the brake
system for a panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the
driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply
brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce
engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD) functions similarly to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine power to be applied to the wheel that is
not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and
ESC are in reduced modes.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such
as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and
objects, and most importantly brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision
or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming
acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing
the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain
to place the transmission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion or serious personal injury.
6
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the rear
fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the
blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors to
let the driver know that the system is operational.
Automatic Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or NEUTRAL.
Manual Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any gear selector position, except REVERSE.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rearview mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper
of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will
alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and
trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM Warning Light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The BSM system may experience dropouts (blinking on
and off) of the side mirror warning indicator lamps
when a motorcycle or any small object remains at the
side of the vehicle for extended periods of time (more
than a couple of seconds).
The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice and
dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can
function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia/
bumper where the radar sensors are located with foreign
objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
SAFETY 165
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice, mud, or
other road contaminations accumulate on the rear fascia/
bumper where the radar sensors are located. The system
may also detect blockage if the vehicle is operated in
areas with extremely low radar returns such as a desert or
parallel to a large elevation drop. If a blockage is detected,
a “Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Wipe Rear
Corners” message will display in the cluster, both mirror
lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP alerts will not
occur. This is normal operation. The system will
automatically recover and resume function when the
condition clears. To minimize system blockage, do not
block the area of the rear fascia/bumper where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it clear of road
contaminations.
Sensor Location
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume
Ú page 167.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 31 mph (50 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed of
less than 15 mph (24 km/h)), the warning light will be
illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two
vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
6
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 SAFETY
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes
Ú page 284.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path — If Equipped
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the
parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed.
The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross
traffic and, if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the
driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alerts,
including reducing the radio volume so that the alert can
be better heard.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help
detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system
is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or
animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance
over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
SAFETY 167
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
Modes Of Operation
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of operation that
are available in the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in RCP mode, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object
is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the
radio volume is reduced so that the alert can be better
heard.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object.
If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will be
reduced so that the alert can be better heard.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced so that the alert can be better heard.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
O
PERATION — IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings and visual warnings (within the instrument
cluster display) to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings are intended to
provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system, to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings.
FCW Message
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
6
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 SAFETY
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated
Ú page 284.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph
(10 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
Turning FCW On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is on; this allows the system to
warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of
you.
The Forward Collision activation/deactivation is located in
"Uconnect Settings" under "Safety And Driving
Assistance". Forward Collision can be checked or
unchecked.
When FCW is selected off, there will be an "FCW OFF" icon
that appears in the instrument cluster display.
Changing the FCW status to off prevents the system from
warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you.
NOTE:
The FCW system’s default state is on. The FCW system
state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next.
If the system is turned off, it will remain off when the
vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW Status
The FCW Sensitivity settings are programmable through
the Uconnect system
Ú page 107.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting in the “On”
setting. This allows the system to warn you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are
farther away and it applies limited braking. This gives you
the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you when you are much closer. This setting
provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting, which
allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
NOTE:
The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
SAFETY 169
(Continued)
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven — this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
See
Ú page 253 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the
tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure
in order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the TPMS Warning Light will
turn off once the system receives the updated tire
pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of
30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi
(186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi
(158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to
turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may
cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi
(186 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be on.
In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only
after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value
Ú page 284.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure, unless your vehicle
is equipped with a Tire Fill Alert (TFA) system.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla-
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres-
sure in the tire.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on after-
market wheels and may contribute to a poor overall
system performance or sensor damage. Customers
are encouraged to use Original Equipment Manufac-
turer (OEM) wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature
operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function
checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
CAUTION!
6
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 SAFETY
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound
when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display an “Inflate to XX” message
and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire
with the low tire pressure values shown in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
shown in a different color in the instrument cluster
graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure inflation value as shown in the “Inflate to XX”
message. Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically update, the
graphic display in the instrument cluster will change color
back to the original color, and the TPMS Warning Light will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
Service Tire Pressure System Warning
If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a "Service Tire Pressure System" message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not
being received.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
SAFETY 171
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash,
and the "Service Tire Pressure System" message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of
the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies
as the TPMS sensors
Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size
does not have a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure
below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next
ignition key cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will remain
on and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in
the instrument cluster will still display a different
color pressure value and an "Inflate to XX" message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
“Service Tire Pressure System” message for five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the
instrument cluster will display a “Service Tire
Pressure System” message for five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact
spare or non-matching full size, the TPMS will update
automatically. In addition, the TPMS Warning Light
will turn off and the graphic in the instrument cluster
will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can be
deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies
(road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not
have TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter wheel
and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensors. Then,
drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h).
The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The
instrument cluster will display the “Service Tire Pressure
System” message and then display dashes (--) in place of
the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “Service Tire Pressure System”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “Service
Tire Pressure System” message and then display pressure
values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle
the "Service Tire Pressure System" message will no longer
be displayed as long as no system fault exists.
6
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 SAFETY
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat,
FCA US LLC recommends that you do not allow
children 12 years old and under to ride in your
vehicle.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly must be secured in the appropriate child
restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position
Ú page 185.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint
Ú page 185.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants could be
injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, see
Ú page 280 for customer service contact
information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from
the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection
and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
SAFETY 173
(Continued)
Vehicles Without Passenger Seating
Installed
If your vehicle does not have a factory installed front
passenger seat and/or rear passenger seats, the features
described in this section may not be available in your
vehicle.
This vehicle has been designed to maximize total
performance. The passenger seats may be deleted, which
may affect the NVH (Noise, Vibration, and Harshness)
characteristics. As a result, the vehicle may be louder
overall. Furthermore, the passenger seats and seat belts
systems are deleted.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is
in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a
few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START
or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are
buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when an outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence
starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and
sounding an intermittent chime.
WARNING!
If the passenger and/or rear seats have been
removed, do not ride in those areas. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
If this vehicle was not factory equipped with a
passenger seat, NEVER attempt to install a
passenger seat because the safety systems,
including the air bags and seat belt, may not properly
protect you.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
this area are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Only ride in available seating positions equipped with
seat belt systems. Always properly wear your seat
belt. Failure to do so could result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death in the event of an accident.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or
not an air bag is also provided at their seating posi-
tions to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in
the event of a crash.
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat if the head
restraints are not in place of their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
WARNING!
6
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts
are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The
driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/
shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat
belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of
the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe
injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat
belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air
bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much
greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You
can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passen-
gers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up prop-
erly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver,
should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air
bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize
the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your inju-
ries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal
injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely
and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one another
in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person,
no matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury
in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
WARNING!
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
SAFETY 175
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal inju-
ries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if
you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
WARNING!
6
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 SAFETY
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately
above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when
worn, the distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occu-
pant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a colli-
sion. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap
belt is not long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and store the
Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
SAFETY 177
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if
they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder
belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place
the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed
air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system
Ú page 192.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
Vehicle With Rear Seating
Rear Seat Delete — Only Front Passenger Seat Available
Passenger Seats Deleted — No Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
6
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 SAFETY
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
All passenger occupants within the vehicle must be in a
seat equipped with a Seat Belt System and Head Restraint
for the safety of the passenger.
If the front passenger and/or rear seats have been
removed do not ride in those areas.
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
SAFETY 179
NOTE:
Vehicles with the front passenger seat deleted will not be
equipped with the Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Seat Belt
Pretensioner, Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag,
and Seat Track Position Sensors for the front passenger.
All passenger occupants within the vehicle must be in a
seat equipped with a Seat Belt System and Head Restraint
for the safety of the passenger.
If the front passenger and/or rear seats have been
removed do not ride in those areas.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic parts
of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC
position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power
or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/
RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning
Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any
part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light,
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial
startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 63.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
6
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 SAFETY
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering
wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air
bag covers.
Front Air Bags/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
seat belts even though you have air bags.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
SAFETY 181
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,
or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce
substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a
collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to
inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The
front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink
your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs
are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or
on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are
at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
6
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label
Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows.
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying
air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags
in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response to
impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side
Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side
impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left
side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a
right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled
or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or
killed. Occupants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from
the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat
belts properly and sit upright with their backs against
the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a
child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
SAFETY 183
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed to
activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether deployment in a
particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and
seat belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate.
In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near
rollover event, and deployment is appropriate, the rollover
sensing system will deploy the side air bags and seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
NOTE:
Vehicles with the front passenger seat deleted will not be
equipped with the Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Seat Belt
Pretensioner, Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag,
and Seat Track Position Sensors for the front passenger.
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions.
This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact
with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally
heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed signifi-
cantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering,
see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irrita-
tion, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have Side
Air Bags.
6
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 SAFETY
(Continued)
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not
be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the inter-
vention of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower
Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the
ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.
If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle elec-
trical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the
system by following the procedure described below. If you
have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must be
towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to have
the Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do
not modify the components or wiring, including
adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering
wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of
the instrument panel. Do not modify the front fascia/
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
SAFETY 185
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the acceler-
ator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the
front.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, FCA US LLC
recommends that you do not allow children 12 years old
and under to ride in your vehicle. If the rear seats are not
present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in
these positions.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air
bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
6
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, FCA US LLC
recommends that you do not allow children 12 years old
and under to ride in your vehicle. If the rear seats are not
present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in
these positions. If you must install a forward facing child
restraint in the front passenger seat, then you must use
the seat belt system to secure the restraint. A top tether
strap extension may be needed to reach the tether anchor
on the rear shelf directly behind the passenger seat.
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by
children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still
less than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who have
not reached the height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat
belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
SAFETY 187
Older Children And Child Restraints
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, FCA US LLC
recommends that you do not allow children 12 years old
and under to ride in your vehicle. If the rear seats are not
present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in
these positions. If you must install a forward facing child
restraint in the front passenger seat, then you must use
the seat belt system to secure the restraint. A top tether
strap extension may be needed to reach the tether anchor
on the rear shelf directly behind the passenger seat.
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing
in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have outgrown
the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should remain in a
forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the
seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat.
The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, FCA US LLC
recommends that you do not allow children 12 years old
and under to ride in your vehicle. If the rear seats are not
present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in
these positions.
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat.
Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can
use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or
remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
6
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, FCA US LLC recommends that you do not allow children 12 years old and under to ride in your vehicle. If the rear seats are not present
in your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these positions.
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position.
These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped
child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no
lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
WARNING!
If the rear or front passenger seats are not present in
your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these
positions.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
SAFETY 189
Vehicles Without Rear Seating Installed
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear passenger seat,
your vehicle is not equipped with LATCH anchorages. If
your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, FCA US LLC
recommends that you do not allow children 12 years old
and under to ride in your vehicle. If the rear seats are not
present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in
these positions. If you must install a forward facing child
restraint in the front passenger seat, then you must use
the seat belt system to secure the restraint. A top tether
strap extension may be needed to reach the tether anchor
on the rear shelf directly behind the passenger seat.
Vehicle With Rear Seating — LATCH Positions For Installing
Child Restraints
Rear Seat Delete — No LATCH Positions In This Vehicle
Passenger Seats Deleted — No LATCH Positions In This Vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lb
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of
the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than
65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
SAFETY 191
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage
symbols on the seatback. They are just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel
between the rear seatback and the rear
window. They are found under a plastic cover
with the tether anchorage symbol on it.
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped
with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will
have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage.
Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The
tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
WARNING!
If the rear or front passenger seats are not present in
your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these
positions.
WARNING!
If the rear or front passenger seats are not present in
your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these
positions.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. For typical installation
instructions, see
Ú page 192.
6
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 SAFETY
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 192 to
check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the
head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the
rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 195 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used
by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle
the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the
child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind
the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat
belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts
are not toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, FCA US LLC
recommends that you do not allow children 12 years old
and under to ride in your vehicle. If the rear seats are not
present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in
these positions.
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH
anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
SAFETY 193
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing
out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the
retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description on
Ú page 177 for additional information
on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, FCA US LLC
recommends that you do not allow children 12 years old
and under to ride in your vehicle. If the rear seats are not
present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in
these positions.
Vehicle With Rear Seating
Rear Seat Delete — Only Front Passenger Seat Available
Passenger Seats Deleted — No Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you
may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can
be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means
the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat
belt to attach a forward-facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward-facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
ALR retractor.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
SAFETY 195
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the
tether strap. For directions to attach a tether anchor,
see
Ú page 195.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether
anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward
to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If
there is no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to another position
in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where
possible, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the two posts. If not possible,
lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
If the rear or front passenger seats are not present in
your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these
positions.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. For the location of
approved tether anchorages in your vehicle, see
Ú page 188.
2 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
6
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 SAFETY
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, FCA US LLC
recommends that you do not allow children 12 years old
and under to ride in your vehicle. If the rear seats are not
present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in
these positions. If you must install a forward facing child
restraint in the front passenger seat, then you must use
the seat belt system to secure the restraint. A top tether
strap extension may be needed to reach the tether anchor
on the rear shelf directly behind the passenger seat.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collection
& Privacy” in your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual or
Ú page 70.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding the seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
mode. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible
outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may
be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle
control could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
SAFETY 197
(Continued)
(Continued)
After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has been
detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed. If the
light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving,
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 172.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See an
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so
it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a
regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing
any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack
an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
WARNING!
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under acceler-
ator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss
of vehicle control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change
the position of the floor mat and may cause interfer-
ence with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
6
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 SAFETY
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nuts/bolt torque for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all
side windows fully open.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
199
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
When the button is activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the
Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use only when your
vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard warning for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may
wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
ASSIST And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber
Ú page 284.
The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be
operable if your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active
and you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 4G (data) network.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
Guardian™ features and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guardian™
services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
7
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you will be
connected to a representative for assistance.
Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you’re
driving and its location. Additional fees may apply for
roadside Assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for Radio,
Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be
a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a
call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call connection,
push the SOS call button on the Rearview Mirror or press
the cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termination
of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the
Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.
The vehicle brand.
The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS
operator may be able to open a voice connection
with the vehicle to determine if additional help is
needed. Once the SOS operator opens a voice
connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the
operator should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in
the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will
attempt to remain connected with the SOS oper-
ator until the SOS operator terminates the connec-
tion.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with
important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
Guardian™ features and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guardian™
services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emer-
gency Services Agent. All occupants should exit the
vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s elec-
trical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY
REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 201
(Continued)
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico
DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons will continuously illuminate red.
The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service”. Please contact an
authorized dealer.
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service”. Please contact an authorized dealer.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or
obstructed.
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.
Operator error by the SOS operator.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion.
Weather.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview Mirror
light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the SOS Call system immediately.
WARNING!
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
WARNING!
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
Guardian™ features and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guardian™
services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
7
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that your
vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your provided
radio supplement for complete information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or
slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (automatic
transmission) or FIRST gear (manual transmission).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the
driver’s front wheel is being changed, block the
passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK LOCATION/SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
The jack, tools and spare tire are stowed under the load
floor in the trunk. Follow the next steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
NOTE:
The spare tire must be removed in order to access the
jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slip-
pery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
WARNING!
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 203
(Continued)
3. Rotate the fastener securing the spare tire counter-
clockwise to remove it.
Removing Tire Fastener
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Rotate the fastener securing the jack counter-
clockwise to remove it.
Removing Jack Fastener
6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from
under the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to
loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from
the jack assembly.
JACKING AND CHANGING A TIRE
Jack Warning Label
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and place an auto-
matic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission
in REVERSE or FIRST gear.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful
of motor traffic.
WARNING!
7
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the
center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
NOTE:
When the following label is present, the spare tire must be
used for the rear wheel(s) only. For a flat front tire, you
must first install the spare on one of the rear tires. Then,
follow the jacking instructions for front tire replacement
and replace the front road wheel with the wheel removed
from the rear of the vehicle.
Spare Tire Label
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel
with the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise
one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations are
critical. See the following images for proper jacking lo-
cations.
Jack Engagement Locations
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest
to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide the jack
on its side and rotate it up into position.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 205
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a center
cap or wheel cover on the compact spare
Ú page 265.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the
lug nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice
Ú page 273. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before
tightening down the fastener.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in serious injury.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
7
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
The Tire Service Kit is located in the
trunk.
NOTE:
Depending on vehicle trim level, tire
service kit models may vary.
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
can be sealed with the Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects
(e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire.
The Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures
down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to
this position for air pump operation only.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to
this position to inject the Tire Service Kit
Sealant and to inflate the tire.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and
release the Power Button again to turn Off
the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes overin-
flated.
1 — Sealant/Air Hose
2 — Hose Accessories
3 — Mode Select Knob
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Deflation Button
6 — Power Switch
7 — Sealant Bottle
8 — Power Plug
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 207
(Continued)
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to the
expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner
on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the
system. See the Sealant Bottle Replacement in this
section for further information.
The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and
needs to be replaced after each use. Always replace
these components immediately at your original equip-
ment vehicle dealer.
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and prop-
erly discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
Tire Service Kit.
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal
punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the
tread/contact surface of your vehicle’s tires.
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to seal
punctures on the tires' side walls.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment
(on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls,
rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the
Air Pump and make sure the Mode Select Knob is in the
Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting
sealant into them.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving on a
flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact
with clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
WARNING!
7
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of
the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button to set the
ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to
the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and
then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant
Hose onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug
into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from
the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
5. Always start the vehicle before turning the
Tire Service Kit on.
6. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the
Sealant Mode position.
7. After pushing the Power Button, the sealant
(white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle
through the Sealant Hose and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within
0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit
off. Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button to turn the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the vehicle is running before turning the
Tire Service Kit on.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous use.
Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
Hose:
4. Continue to operate the pump until sealant
is no longer flowing through hose (typically
takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows
through the Sealant Hose, the Pressure Gauge
can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 bar). The Pressure Gauge
will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 bar)
to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle is
empty.
5. The pump will start to inject air into the tire
immediately after the Sealant Bottle is empty.
Continue to operate the pump and inflate the
tire to the cold tire inflation pressure found on
the tire and loading information label located in the
driver-side door opening. Check the tire pressure by
looking at the Pressure Gauge.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 209
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within
15 minutes:
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within 15 minutes:
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation Button
to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation
pressure before continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire
Service Kit off.
2. Remove the speed limit label from the Tire
Service Kit and place sticker on the steering
wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the
vehicle storage location.
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and
inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles
(8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of
the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do
not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning Flashers.
Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the
valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit
when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
Place the transmission in PARK (P) and cycle the igni-
tion in the OFF position.
Apply the parking brake.
NOTE:
If tire has improper inflation follow these next steps:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground
next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose onto the
valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug
into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting at the
end of the hose onto the valve stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to the
Air Mode position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using the Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure
to follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible
at an authorized dealer.
7
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire
Service Kit and inflate the tire to the cold tire
inflation pressure found on the tire and
loading information label located in the
driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation Button
to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation
pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at
the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steering
wheel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized
dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
Hose Location
3. Remove the bottle cover.
Remove The Bottle Cover
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.
Rotate The Bottle Up
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
Remove The Bottle
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 211
NOTE:
For sealant bottle installation, follow these steps in
reverse order.
The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and
needs to be replaced after each use. Always replace
these components immediately at your original equip-
ment vehicle dealer.
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to the
expiration date (printed on the bottle label) to ensure
optimum operation of the system.
Sealant Bottle Expiration Date Location
ALTERNATE TIRE SERVICE KIT —
I
F EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm)
in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire
Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
screws or nails) should not be removed
from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be
used in outside temperatures down to
approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.
Tire Service Kit Location
WARNING!
As required by current regulations, the information on
chemical substances for the protection of human
health and the environment and on the safe use of the
sealing fluid are on the packaging label. Compliance
with the indications on the label is an essential
condition to ensure the safety and effectiveness of the
product. Remember to carefully read the label before
use. The user of the product is responsible for any
damages caused by improper use. The sealing fluid has
an expiration date. Replace the bottle if the sealant has
expired.
CAUTION!
Dispose of the bottle and the sealant liquid properly.
Have them disposed of in compliance with national and
local regulations.
7
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit Components And
Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
USING THE MODE SELECT KNOB AND HOSES
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (6) and turn
to this position for air pump operation only.
Use the Black Air Pump Hose (8) when
selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (6) and turn
to this position to inject the Tire Service Kit
Sealant and to inflate the tire. Use the
Sealant Hose (clear hose) (4) when
selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (3) once
to turn on the Tire Service Kit. Push and
release the Power Button (3) again to turn
Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the
air pressure in the tire if it becomes overin-
flated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (4) prior to the expiration date (printed at
the upper left hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
optimum operation of the system
Ú page 216.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (4) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and prop-
erly discarded.
1 — Sealant Bottle
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Power Button
4 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
5 — Pressure Gauge
6 — Mode Select Knob
7 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire
Service Kit)
8 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 213
(Continued)
For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
Tire Service Kit.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose (8) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(6) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid
injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant
is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch
(6 mm) diameter in the tread of your tire.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) WHENEVER YOU STOP TO USE TIRE
SERVICE KIT:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (4)
and (8) to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire
Service Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the
best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant
into the deflated tire and running the air pump. Move
the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in
this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission)
or in Gear (manual transmission) and place the
ignition in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road
to avoid the danger of being hit when using the
Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving on a
flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact
with clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
WARNING!
7
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(B) SETTING UP TO USE TIRE SERVICE KIT:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (6) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (4) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to
the deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (4) onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (7) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from
the tire.
(C) INJECTING TIRE SERVICE KIT SEALANT
INTO THE DEFLATED TIRE:
Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE:
Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking
brake engaged and the gear selector in NEUTRAL.
After pushing the Power Button (3), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (4) and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
seconds through the Sealant Hose :
1. Push the Power Button (3) to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (4) from
the valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of
debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose (4) to the valve
stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob (6) is in the
Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the
Power Button (3) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (7) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE:
If the Mode Select Knob (6) is on Air Mode and the pump
is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose (8)
only, not the Sealant Hose (4).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
Hose :
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through the hose (typically takes
30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the
Sealant Hose (4), the Pressure Gauge (5) can read
as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (5)
will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi
(4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the
Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire
immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to
the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on
the driver-side latch pillar (recommended pressure).
Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure
Gauge (5).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation Button
(2) to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 215
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (3) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the
instrument panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (4) from
the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the
end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the
vehicle storage location.
(D) DRIVE VEHICLE:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
(E) AFTER DRIVING:
Pull over to a safe location before continuing Ú page 213.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (6) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (8) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose on to the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (5).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (3) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the
tire and loading information label on the driver-side
door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation Button
(2) to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at
the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (4)
assembly at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized
dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
CAUTION!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug (7) may get hot
after use, so it should be handled carefully.
Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (4) can result in sealant contacting
your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can
also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service
Kit components which may cause permanent
damage to the kit.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
7
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(F) SEALANT BOTTLE AND HOSE REPLACE-
MENT:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (4) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (4) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (4) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in
the vehicle.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly,
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump starting.
Remote Jump Starting Post Locations
NOTE:
The remote battery posts are viewed by standing on the
right side of the vehicle looking over the fender. The
positive battery post may be covered with a protective cap.
Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive battery
post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off the
remote positive post which has a positive
(+) symbol on or
around the post.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than
12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
Remote Positive (+) Post
Remote Negative
(-) Post
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 217
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift into PARK (automatic
transmission) or FIRST gear (manual transmission)
and cycle the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cover over the
remote positive
(+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach, apply the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable to
the remote positive
(+)
post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative
(-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper
cable to the remote negative
(-) post (exposed
metallic/unpainted post of the discharge vehicle)
located directly behind the under-hood fuse box.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the disconnection
procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative
(-)
post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery, and reinstall the
protective cap.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 RPM since it provides no charging benefit,
wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle engine.
7
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system
inspected at an authorized dealer.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced by
an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating can be:
Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
Strong smell of coolant
White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
In the event it is observed that the temperature gauge is
moving towards or close to the HOT (H) position, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supple-
ment to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE–8–SPEED
TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use
(i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H),
and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking
brake before activating the Manual Park Release. In
addition, you should be seated in the driver's seat with
your foot firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park
Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not
secured by the parking brake, or by proper connection
to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 219
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a
depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
To use the Manual Park Release, see the following steps:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the console storage bin to access the
Manual Park Release lever.
Console Storage Bin
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the
tether strap up through the opening in the console
base.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the
lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing
it to the right.
6. Pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and
rearward until it locks in place in the vertical position.
The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be moved.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
Engaging The Lever
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear
side) rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the
lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down, to its original position, until the locking tab
snaps into place to secure the lever.
Disengaging The Lever
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the console storage bin.
NOTE:
When the lever is in the release position the access cover
cannot be reinstalled.
7
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then shift
back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE
(with automatic transmission) or FIRST gear and REVERSE
(with manual transmission), while gently pressing the
accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without
spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts between
DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel
speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the trans-
mission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two seconds,
you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or
REVERSE.
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” mode, before rocking
the vehicle
Ú page 161. Once the vehicle has been freed,
push the ESC OFF button again to restore “ESC On” mode.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine
to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least
one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles.
This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of
clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts
to free a stuck vehicle.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping when you
are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel,
no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE / FIRST gear and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear
(no transmission shifting occurring).
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 221
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery is discharged, find Instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
Ú page 218.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground RWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
Transmission in
NEUTRAL
30 mph (48 km/h)
max speed
30 miles (48 km)
max distance
NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
NOT RECOMMENDED (but, if used, same
limitations as previously mentioned)
NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED
NOT RECOMMENDED, but, if used:
Ignition in ON/RUN mode
Transmission in
NEUTRAL (NOT in PARK)
Flatbed
ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
FCA US LLC does not recommend towing this vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
7
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) MODELS —
I
F EQUIPPED
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all four
wheels
OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the transmission and driveline are operable, AWD
models can also be towed with the ignition in the ON/RUN
mode, the transmission in NEUTRAL (not in PARK!), and
the rear wheels
OFF the ground with no limitation on
speed or distance. Since the ignition MUST be in the
ON/RUN mode to tow in this manner, AWD vehicles must
be towed with ALL FOUR wheels
OFF the ground
(e.g. on a flatbed truck) if the key fob is unavailable.
REAR-WHEEL DRIVE (RWD) MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all four
wheels
OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N). Instructions
on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) when the
engine is off
Ú page 218.
The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles
(48 km).
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km), then the only acceptable method of
towing is with a flatbed truck.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes effect
in the event of an impact Ú page 184.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed under certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle
Ú page 185.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle using any other method can
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously
mentioned requirements can cause severe engine
and/or transmission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
223
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
3.6L AND 5.7L ENGINES
These engines are equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for the vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, and extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the “Change
Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
The “Oil Change Required” message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first.
The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only
a concern for fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering (if equipped) and
fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Plan — 3.6L And 5.7L
Refer to the maintenance chart for the required
maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 225
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot
seals and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front
axle fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
X X X X X X X
Inspect the manual transmission fluid
(if equipped).
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four wheel disc brakes.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid
(All Wheel Drive Only).
X X X X X
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
X X
Change the manual transmission fluid
(if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of
the following: Most of your driving is at
sustained speeds during hot weather, above
90°F (32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or
stop and go driving.
X X X
Change the transfer case fluid; if using your
vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
(All Wheel Drive Only).
X X
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 227
Change the rear axle fluid and on models
equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change
the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for
any of the following: police, taxi, fleet,
off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
X X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 — Engine Oil Fill
2 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 229
5.7L ENGINE
1 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 — Engine Oil Fill
2 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about ten minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the low end
of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the high end
of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades
clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 Gallon (4 Liters) of
washer fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid”
appears in the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Never smoke while working in the engine compart-
ment: gas and flammable vapors may be present,
with the risk of fire.
Be very careful when working in the engine compart-
ment when the engine is hot: you may get burned. Do
not get too close to the radiator cooling fan: the elec-
tric fan may start; danger of injury. Scarves, ties and
other loose clothing might be pulled by moving parts.
CAUTION!
Be careful not to confuse the various types of fluids
while topping up: they are not compatible with each
other! Topping up with an unsuitable fluid could
severely damage your car.
The oil level must never exceed the MAX mark.
Always top up using engine oil of the same specifica-
tions as what is already in the engine.
If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for the
engine to cool down before loosening the filler cap,
particularly for vehicles with aluminum caps (if
equipped). WARNING: risk of burns!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are
flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must
be exercised when filling or working around the washer
solution.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 231
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
Water will never have to be added, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
NOTE:
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery terminals are located in the engine
compartment for jump starting
Ú page 216.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner.
Service Manuals are available which include detailed
service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service
Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may
void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluids
Ú page 278.
NOTE:
Hemi engines at times can tick right after startup and then
quiet down after approximately 30 seconds. This is normal
and will not harm the engine. This characteristic can be
caused by short drive cycles: for example, if the vehicle is
started then shut off after driving a short distance. Upon
restarting, you may experience a ticking sound. Other
causes could be if the vehicle is unused for an extended
period of time, incorrect oil, extended oil changes or
extended idling. If the engine continues to tick or if the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on, see the
nearest authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water
Ú page 216.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the posi-
tive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and
connections however, the pressures generated by these
machines is such that complete protection against
water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by the
API. The manufacturer only recommends API trademark
oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies 0W-20,
0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40 and
5W-40 engine oil.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
numbers should not be used.
Shaker Hood — If Equipped
Shaker Hood Oil Filler
For vehicles equipped with a Shaker Hood, the upper
scoop will need to be removed so that oil can be properly
added to the engine.
To do this, see the following procedure:
1. Remove the four nuts with the Shaker tool located in
glove compartment.
2. Lift off the upper scoop.
NOTE:
Be sure to clean off all debris around or inside the Shaker
assembly.
3. Locate the oil fill cover in the base assembly and
expose the oil fill cap.
4. Remove oil fill cap to add oil.
5. Reinstall Shaker assembly.
Shaker Hood Air Filter Cleaning
Shaker air filters are made of a unique, washable
synthetic material. Base program air filters with paper
media cannot be washed. All filters follow the same
service interval, though Shaker systems substitute a
cleaning while paper air filter elements are to be replaced.
1. Remove the air filter from the intake and set the
filter clamp aside.
2. Measure the length of the filter media.
3. Fill a bucket with warm clean water to the depth
matching the filter media measurement and add a
mild household detergent or air filter cleaning
solution.
NOTE:
Never use strong detergents, high pressure, or gasoline on
air filters.
4. Without allowing the solution to flow back into the
inside of the air filter, submerge the filter media into
the water and let it soak for ten minutes.
5. Empty the bucket filled with dirty water and repeat
steps 3 and 4.
6. Refill the bucket with clean warm water and rinse the
filter by rotating the filter.
NOTE:
The water should be clean with no signs of dirt in the
bucket.
7. Allow the filter to air dry. Reinstall the filter on the
intake system once it is dry.
NOTE:
Do not use forced air pressure to dry the air filter as
damage may occur and void the warranty.
Shaker Hood Removal And Cleaning
1. Remove the four nuts with the Shaker tool located in
the glove compartment.
2. Lift off the upper scoop.
NOTE:
Be sure to clean off all debris around or inside of the
Shaker assembly.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 233
3. Using water and mild detergent, clean the following
locations:
The water drain slot located at the front forward
edge of the Shaker assembly.
The seals attached to the scoop and air box.
Lower water drains located in the lower Shaker
assembly and air box as well as the hood interface
areas for the seals. Apply Mopar® Leather,
Rubber & Vinyl Protectant after cleaning the seals.
4. Reinstall Shaker assembly.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified filters
should be used. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is
unavailable, only use filters that meet or exceed
SAE/USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 224.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions” mainte-
nance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality Mopar® certified filters should be used.
T/A Air Filter Maintenance — If Equipped
Clean Engine Air Filter
T/A air filters are made of a unique, washable material.
Follow the recommended service interval as for non-T/A
air filters, substituting a cleaning for replacement.
Cleaning your engine air filter with the recommended
Mopar® Performance Air Filter Service Kit is not required
if you can still see any part of the wire screen on the entire
air filter regardless of how dirty it may appear. When any
part of the wire screen is no longer visible on the air filter,
that is an indication it is time to clean the air filter.
For cleaning instructions see steps 1-7 from the Shaker
Hood Air Filter Cleaning section
Ú page 232.
Unique for T/A, using the Mopar® Performance Air Filter
Service Kit, spray oil evenly along the crown of each filter
pleat holding the nozzle about 3 inches (76 mm) away
from the air filter. One spray per 2 square inches
(1,290 square mm) of air filter. With one complete coat of
oil, let it wick (saturate) for about 20 minutes, and if
required touch up any light areas on either side of the
filter.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a — If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
rocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by an authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by
pressing the retaining clips.
Access Door
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
Filter Access Cover
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, for further warranty
information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury
or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 235
(Continued)
3. Remove the used filter.
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
Cabin Air Filter
5. Close the filter access cover.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 223.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from
belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
Belt slips
Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct
position on pulley)
Belt broken (identify and correct problem before new
belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such
as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating,
excess oil and grease should be removed.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
WARNING!
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release
mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and
lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
press the release tab on the wiper blade and while
holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper
blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm
is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of
the wiper arm.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm, latch engagement will be accompanied by an
audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 237
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have
the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is
raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can
result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when
the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires discon-
nected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or
for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
NOTE:
The vehicle exhaust system may be equipped with an Elec-
tronic Exhaust Valve (EEV) system, if the exhaust system is
replaced with aftermarket products a Malfunction Indi-
cator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate.
COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO,
Ú page 196.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle
in areas where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF
position. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON position.
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the
radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty,
clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 224.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 278.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant,
may result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is introduced
into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors
or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radi-
ator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not recom-
mended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact an
authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important to use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant
conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your
vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water.
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated.
Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 239
(Continued)
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact an
authorized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended and
can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT
coolant are mixed in an emergency, have an authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant will
return to the radiator from the coolant expansion
bottle/recovery tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in
open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground: clean up any ground spills immediately. If
ingested, seek emergency assistance immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is
adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant.
Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle
need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers
of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front
of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of
moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating
on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter
the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs
to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the
cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a minimum
of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and
distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
WARNING!
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically
Ú page 224.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if
the Brake System Warning Light indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when
performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements
described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes,
fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a
checkup may be needed.
Use only brake fluid that has been recommended by the
manufacturer, and has been kept in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture
Ú page 278.
CLUTCH HYDRAULIC SYSTEM — MANUAL
T
RANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated volume
of fluid within the brake system master cylinder reservoir.
In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
manufacturer's recommended brake fluid
Ú page 278.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left
side of the transmission. The fluid level should be
1/4 inch (6.4mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level
Ú page 278.
Change Transmission Fluid
If contaminated with water, change the fluid immediately.
See an authorized dealer for service.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 224.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly
a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the
brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking capacity
in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid
Ú page 278. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can
severely damage your brake system and/or impair its
performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause
it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer's recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
damage to the transmission
Ú page 278.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 241
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
I
F EQUIPPED
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the
vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer's specified transmission fluid
Ú page 278. It is important to maintain the transmission
fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant should be used.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The All-Wheel Drive system consists of a transfer case and
front differential. The exterior surface of these components
should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks. Confirmed
leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in the
middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer case fluid
level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The fluid level should
be even with the bottom of the hole. Use this plug to add
fluid as required.
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover
near the half shaft attachment. To inspect the differential
fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level should be
even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole.
Fluid Changes
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 223.
REAR AXLE
Fluid Level Check
Checking the fluid level while the vehicle is on level ground
and has been stationary for 15 minutes will improve the
accuracy of the fluid level reading.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle.
The fluid level should be 1-2.5 mm below the fill plug. Add
fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level
Ú
page 278.
Change Axle Fluid
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 223.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the
chemicals can damage your transmission components.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder
Ú page 278.
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Underhood Fuses
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are printed
on the inside of the power distribution center cover.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous
electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected. Never replace a blown fuse
with metal wires or any other material. Do not place
a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa.
Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element
(blown fuse)
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is
important to ensure the cover is properly positioned
and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
into the power distribution center and possibly result in
an electrical system failure.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 243
Front Power Distribution Center Location
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02
40 Amp Green
–
Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L & Non – Police)
50 Amp Red Radiator Fan (6.2L & Police)
F03 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #1 *
F04 30 Amp Pink – Starter
F05 40 Amp Green – Anti-Lock Brake
F06 30 Amp Pink – Anti-Lock Brake
F07 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC #1
F08 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
F09 – 20 Amp Yellow All-Wheel Drive Module *
F10 – 10 Amp Red Intrusion MOD (300) * / Under Hood Lamp – Police
F11 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
F12 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F13 – – Spare
F14 – – Spare
F15 – 20 Amp Yellow Left HID Headlamp *
F16 – 20 Amp Yellow Right HID Headlamp *
F18 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan #2
F19 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #2 *
F20 30 Amp Pink – Wiper Motor
F21
30 Amp Pink
–
Headlamp Washers *
20 Amp Blue – Police Police Bat Feed #2
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
F22
40 Amp Green
–
LTR Cooling Pump (6.2L Eng)
20 Amp Blue – Police Police Bat Feed # 3
F23 20 Amp Blue – Police Bat Feed # 1
F24 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run/ACC Feed # 3
F28 – – Spare
F29 – 15 Amp Blue Auto Trans (Challenger / Police)
F30 – – Spare
F31 – 25 Amp Clear Engine Module
F32 – – Spare
F33 – – Spare
F34 – 25 Amp Clear ASD Feed #1
F35 – 20 Amp Yellow ASD Feed #2
F36 – 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake Module / Steering Column Lock Module *
F37 – 10 Amp Red Engine Controller
F38 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F39 – 10 Amp Red A/C Clutch / EPS */ Vacuum Pump *
F48 – 10 Amp Red AWD Module / Front Axle Disconnect *
F49 – – Spare
F50 – – Spare
F51 – 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump *
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Adaptive Cruise Control *
F53 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Fuses
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and
descriptions are printed on the inside of the power
distribution center cover.
Rear Power Distribution Center Location
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is
important to ensure the cover is properly positioned
and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
into the power distribution center and possibly result in
an electrical system failure.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F02 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #1
F03 – – Spare
F04 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #2
F05
30 Amp Pink
–
Sunroof *
20 Amp Blue – Police Dome Lamp – Police
F06 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #1
F07 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #2
F08 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lighting
F09 40 Amp Green – Power Locks
F10 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Control Module
F11 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Control Module
F12 – 20 Amp Yellow
Cigar Lighter / IP APO / RR USB
(Selectable Fuse) *
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
F15 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower
F16 20 Amp Blue – Left Spot Lamp – Police
F17 20 Amp Blue – Right Spot Lamp – Police
F18 30 Amp Pink – VISM Mod (Police)
F19 – – Spare
F20 – – Spare
F21
30 Amp Pink
–
Fuel Pump (Non 6.2L ADR)
40 Amp Green Fuel Pump #2 (6.2L XVC)
F22 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Gateway Module
F23 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door SW * / Diagnostic Port
F24 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack
F25 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor System
F26 – 15 Amp Blue Trans Mod (Charger / 300)
F27 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier *
F31 – 25 Amp Breaker Power Seats *
F32 – 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module / Cluster
F33 – 15 Amp Blue
IGN SW / Wireless Mod / Steer Clmn Lock
Mod / Remote Start *
F34 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Module / Clock (300)
F35 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
F36 – 15 Amp Blue Active Exhaust Valve *
F37 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F38 – 20 Amp Yellow Media Hub / Console APO
F40 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump #1 (6.2L ADR)
F41
30 Amp Pink
–
Fuel Pump #2 (6.2L ADR)
40 Amp Green Fuel Pump #1 (6.2L XVC)
F42 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defrost
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow
Rear Heated Seats * / Heated Steering
Wheel *
F44 – 10 Amp Red
Park Assist */ Blind Spot */ Rear View
Camera *
F45 – 15 Amp Blue
Cluster / Rearview Mirror / Lane Departure
*
F46 – – Spare
F47 – 10 Amp Red
Adaptive Front Lighting */ Day Time
Running Lamps *
F48 – 20 Amp Yellow Active Suspension – (6.4L*/ 6.2L)
F49 – – Spare
F50 – – Spare
F51 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated */ Vented Seats *
F52 – 10 Amp Red
Heated Cup Holders */ Rear Heated Seat
Switches *
F53 – 10 Amp Red
HVAC Module / In Vehicle Temperature
Sensor
F54 – – Spare
F55 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
F56 – – Spare
F57 – – Spare
F58 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F59 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals – Police
F60 – – Spare
F61 – – Spare
F62 – – Spare
F63 – – Spare
F64 – 25 Amp Breaker Rear Windows (Charger/300)
F65 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F66 – – Spare
F67 – 10 Amp Red
Rain & Light Sensor */ Sunroof */ Inside
RearView Mirror / Police Run Acc
F68 – 10 Amp Red Rear USB Timer / Rear Sunshade *
F69 – – Spare
F70 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps 578
Visor Vanity Lamps A6220
Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped 194
Door Courtesy 562
Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder LED
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
* The headlamps are a type of high-voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of this, you should
not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge (HID) D3S (Serviced at an authorized dealer) *
Halogen Headlamp HIR2LL
Front Park/Turn Lamp LED
Front Fog Lamp H11LL
Front Side Marker LED
Tail Lamp LED
Stop/Turn Lamp LED
Rear Side Marker LED
Backup Lamp LED
Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED
License LED
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
LOW BEAM HEADLAMP, HIGH BEAM
HEADLAMP — MODELS WITH HALOGEN
HEADLAMPS — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
Headlamp Assembly Dust Cap Location
NOTE:
Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary
prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assembly on the
driver side of the vehicle.
2. Remove the large dust cap from the headlamp
housing by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise, and remove.
Headlamp Location
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
5. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the
headlamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
6. Reinstall the access cap making sure it is seated into
the housing and turn cap clockwise to engage locking
lugs. Visually, you should be unable to see the blue
O-ring gasket. The access cap should be uniformly
seated and you should not be able to pull the access
cap off without turning it counterclockwise.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb
comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb
with rubbing alcohol.
CAUTION!
If the access cap is not installed correctly after bulb
replacement, the lamp becomes susceptible to dust,
condensation, and water intrusion. This may ultimately
lead to an inoperative lamp. If the access cap cannot
be installed correctly, please return to an authorized
dealer for proper repair or access cap replacement if
necessary.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 253
LOW BEAM HEADLAMP, HIGH BEAM HEAD-
LAMP — MODELS WITH HIGH INTENSITY
DISCHARGE (HID) HEADLAMPS — IF EQUIPPED
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed.
Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when the
headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps.
This diminishes and becomes more white after approxi-
mately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
FRONT PARK/SIGNATURE LAMP
The Front Park/Signature function is part of the headlamp
assembly and use LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The headlamps must be replaced as an
assembly, see an authorized dealer.
FRONT TURN/DRL LAMP
The Front Turn/DRL function is part of the headlamp
assembly and use LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The headlamps must be replaced as an
assembly, see an authorized dealer.
FRONT/REAR SIDE MARKER LAMP
The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an
assembly, see an authorized dealer.
TAIL/TURN AND STOP LAMP
The Tail/Turn and Stop Lamps use LED lamps that are not
serviceable separately. The Tail/Turn and Stop Lamps
must be replaced as an assembly, see an authorized
dealer.
CENTER TAIL/BACKUP LAMP
The Center Tail/Backup Lamp use LED lamps that are not
serviceable separately. The Center Tail/Backup Lamp
must be replaced as an assembly; see an authorized
dealer.
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP (CHMSL)
The CHMSL Lamp uses LED sources that are not
serviceable separately. The CHMSL Lamp must be
replaced as an assembly; see an authorized dealer.
LICENSE LAMP
The License Lamp uses an LED source that is not
serviceable separately. The License Lamp must be
replaced as an assembly; see an authorized dealer.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or
electrocution if not serviced properly. See an authorized
dealer for service.
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact
spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 255
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located
on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will
find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 257
Tire Terminology And Definitions
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd
week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire And Loading Information
Placard
Ú page 97.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles must
not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing
Ú page 97.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 259
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of
the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response
or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judg-
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of 3 hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can
cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase
your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended
load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in
overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or
conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation.
Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not
designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa).
Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced
immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run
Flat tire is changed after being driven under a Run Flat
mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition, please replace the TPMS
sensor as it is not designed to be reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on
a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
See the Tire Pressure Monitoring System section for more
information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
For further information
Ú page 220.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other
types of tires.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 263
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle sched-
uled maintenance is highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when installing
new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
manufacturer strongly recommends using tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed
Ú page 263. Refer to the Tire And
Loading Information Placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire
Ú page 253.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously
when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on
ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when
ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information,
contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in
size and type to the original equipment tires.
Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/
h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to
steering and suspension components. You could
lose control and have a collision resulting in serious
injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with
load ratings approved for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire designated
for temporary emergency use
Ú page 102.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
And Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description
Example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original
equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle
and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not
hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice
or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels.
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or
their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This
activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and
prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire And Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side
door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.
Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner
or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels,
DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing
compounds. They will permanently damage this finish
and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 267
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these recommendations to
guard against damage.
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
RWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(Maximum Projection Beyond Tire
Profile Or Equivalent)
SXT
Rear
235/55R18
245/45R20
Peerless Chain Super Z6 Low Profile or
Equivalent
GT 245/45ZR20
R/T
245/45ZR20
275/40ZR20
AWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(Maximum Projection Beyond Tire
Profile Or Equivalent)
SXT
Rear
235/55R19
245/45R20
S Class
GT
245/45R20
245/45ZR20
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 223. The
reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected
prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire
graded 100.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components, it
is important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 269
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 3
weeks, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started
again.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons
are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is
operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme
conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim,
and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth.
To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch the
paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint
and decals.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 271
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar® Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts
from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the belts
if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work
properly.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. If
your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar®
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any
foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than
darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning,
and the manufacturer recommends Mopar® total care
leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather
seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or
ketone-based cleaning products to clean leather
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may result.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
273
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel.
The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield.
Windshield VIN Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. There
will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness.
This may be evident by increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop,
and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine off),
the brakes will still function. The effort required to brake
the vehicle will be much greater than that required with
the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle,
the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket
is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it
halfway).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or service
station.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 ft-lb
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
9
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly tightened.
Torque Patterns
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see a dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
recommended octane number can cause engine failure
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emission
regulations and provide excellent fuel economy
and performance when using high-quality
unleaded regular gasoline having an octane
rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use
of higher octane premium gasoline will not provide any
benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
5.7L ENGINE (WITH AUTOMATIC
T
RANSMISSION)
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emission
regulations and provide satisfactory fuel
economy and performance when using high
quality unleaded gasoline having a posted
octane number range of 87 to 89 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane plus gasoline is
recommended for optimum performance and fuel
economy.
5.7L ENGINE (WITH MANUAL
T
RANSMISSION)
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emission
regulations, provide optimal fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality unleaded
premium gasoline having a posted octane
number of 91 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of 91 or higher octane premium gasoline is required
for this engine.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in personal injury.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 275
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to further
aide in minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
9
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasolines to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life
and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of meth-
anol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 277
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 18.5 gal 70 L
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 6 qt 5.6 L
5.7L Engine 7 qt 6.6 L
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine 11.1 qt 10.5 L
5.7L Engine 14.7 qt 13.9 L
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
9
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full synthetic
SAE 5W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trademark
Ú page 232.
Mopar® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to the manufacturer Material Standard
MS-6395 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full synthetic
SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trademark
Ú page 232.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine With Automatic Transmission 89 Octane recommended – 87 Octane acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine With Manual Transmission 91 Octane or higher (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 279
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion
protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or
any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may
affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3, SAE J1703.
Front Axle – AWD (If Equipped) We recommend using Mopar® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5).
Rear Axle – 3.6L/5.7L Engine With
Automatic Transmission
We recommend using Mopar® OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
Rear Axle – 5.7L Engine With Manual Transmission We recommend using Mopar® LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
Transfer Case – AWD (If Equipped) We recommend using Mopar® Transfer Case Lubricant for Borg Warner 44–40.
9
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to the current
problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for
an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you are
still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of
the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the FCA US LLC's Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer center
should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com(USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if you
are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside
Assistance services last for five years or 60,000 miles on
the odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated from the
start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as set forth in
your Warranty Information book.
1
1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc.
Medford, MA 02155, except in AK,CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where services
are provided by Cross Country Motor Club of California, Inc., Thousand
Oaks, CA 91360.
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of
gas/fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing as
a result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free: USA:
1-800-521-2779/Canada: 1-800-363-4869. Provide your
name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) required for
covered services, license plate number, and your location,
including the telephone number from which you are
calling. Briefly describe the nature of the problem and
answer a few simple questions.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 281
You will be given the name of the service provider and an
estimated time of arrival. If you feel you are in an unsafe
situation, please let us know. With your consent, we will
contact local police or safety authorities.
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you may
submit your original receipts from the licensed towing or
service facility, for services rendered within30 days of the
occurrence. Be sure to include your VIN, odometer
mileage at the time of service, and current mailing
address. We will process the claim based on vehicle and
service eligibility. If eligible, we will reimburse you for the
reasonable amount actually paid, based on the usual and
customary charges for that service in the area where they
were provided. FCA US LLC’s determination relating to
reimbursement is final. Correspondence should be mailed
to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time.
The Roadside Assistance program is subject to restrictions
and conditions of use, which are determined solely by
FCA US LLC.
Flat Tire Service
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch a
service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare tire
(if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s Manual.
This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home. We will
dispatch a service provider to deliver a small amount of
fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you to a nearby station.
This service is limited to two occurrences in a 12-month
period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen locks
are keeping you from getting on your way, help is just a
phone call away. This service is limited to providing access
to the vehicle’s seating area. It does not cover the cost of
replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and
confidence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a result of
a mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance will
dispatch a towing service to transport your vehicle to the
closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram dealer.
If you choose to go to another dealer, you will be
responsible for the cost if the extra distance exceeds
10 miles.
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 423-6343
Fax: (787) 782-3345
10
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and
for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans are the
ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional
protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you
purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service contract, call
the FCA US LLC’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract you
may have purchased from another manufacturer. If you
require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to ensure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and
market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for further
information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this vehicle
and market.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts &
accessories and factory filled fluids are
available from an authorized dealer.
They are recommended for your
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain its
original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle
components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects, or other reproductive harm.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 283
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/
or components and is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make it
easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
10
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have changed
your address, please provide the following information
and mail to:
FCA US LLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
Vehicle Indentification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
Exact Odometer Reading
First and Last Name
Phone Number
Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
285
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes ................................................ 74, 273
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).................................84
, 85
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............................ 238
Adding Washing Fluid .................................................. 230
Additives, Fuel .............................................................. 275
Advance Phone Connectivity....................................... 142
Air Bag........................................................................... 180
Advance Front Air Bag ............................................ 180
Air Bag Operation.................................................... 181
Air Bag Warning Light ............................................. 179
Enhanced Accident Response ...................... 184
, 222
Event Data Recorder (EDR).................................... 222
Front Air Bag ........................................................... 180
If Deployment Occurs ............................................. 183
Knee Impact Bolsters............................................. 181
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .......................... 184
Maintenance........................................................... 184
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ......................... 179
Side Air Bags........................................................... 181
Transporting Pets.................................................... 196
Air Bag Light .................................................63
, 179, 196
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)........... 233
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................................... 234
Air Conditioner Refrigerant.......................................... 234
Air Conditioner System ................................................ 234
Air Conditioning ...............................................................45
Air Conditioning Filter ........................................... 49
, 234
Air Conditioning System..................................................45
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips.....................................48
Air Filter......................................................................... 233
Air Pressure
Tires..........................................................................261
Alarm
Arm The System.................................................. 19
, 20
Panic........................................................................... 13
Rearm The System....................................................20
Security Alarm..................................................... 19
, 66
Alarm System
Security Alarm............................................................ 19
All Wheel Drive
Towing ......................................................................222
All Wheel Drive (AWD)...................................................241
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.......................................................................... 8
Alternate Tire Service Kit — If Equipped
b
..............211
Android Auto........................................................ 144
, 145
Android auto™
b
.......................................................144
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............................... 238
, 277
Disposal ...................................................................239
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .....................................159
Anti-Lock Warning Light.................................................. 66
Apple CarPlay ...................................................... 144
, 147
Apple carplay® ¹...........................................................146
Arming System
Security Alarm............................................................ 19
Assist, Hill Start.............................................................162
Audio Settings...............................................................131
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................................106
Auto Down Power Windows............................................52
Automatic Door Locks ....................................................24
Automatic Headlights .....................................................41
Automatic High Beams .................................................. 40
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......................... 48
Automatic Transmission ................................................ 79
Adding Fluid....................................................241
, 279
Fluid And Filter Change...........................................241
Fluid Change ...........................................................241
Fluid Level Check.................................................... 241
Fluid Type .......................................................241
, 279
Special Additives..................................................... 241
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ................. 81
AutoPark ......................................................................... 72
Autostick
Operation................................................................... 82
AWD
Towing...................................................................... 222
Axle Fluid....................................................................... 279
Axle Lubrication ............................................................279
B
Back Up Camera............................................................. 96
Battery.................................................................... 64
, 231
Charging System Light.............................................. 64
Keyless Key Fob Replacement................................. 13
Location ...................................................................231
Belts, Seat.....................................................................196
Blind Spot Monitoring ..................................................164
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing ............................139
Body Mechanism Lubrication...................................... 235
B-Pillar Location ...........................................................258
11
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286
Brake Assist System .................................................... 160
Brake Control System .................................................. 160
Brake Fluid .......................................................... 240
, 279
Brake System ......................................................240
, 273
Fluid Check.....................................................240
, 279
Master Cylinder....................................................... 240
Parking .......................................................................74
Warning Light................................................... 64
, 273
Brake/Transmission Interlock........................................79
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ....................74
Brightness, Interior Lights ..............................................43
Bulb Replacement ....................................................... 250
Bulbs, Light.......................................................... 198
, 250
C
Camera, Rear ..................................................................96
Capacities, Fluid........................................................... 277
Caps, Filler
Fuel.............................................................................96
Oil (Engine).............................................................. 228
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)................................... 239
Car Washes .................................................................. 270
Carbon Monoxide Warning.......................................... 198
Cargo
Vehicle Loading..........................................................97
Cargo Net.........................................................................55
CD.................................................................................. 133
Cellular Phone .............................................................. 158
Certification Label...........................................................98
Chains, Tire................................................................... 267
Chart, Tire Sizing .......................................................... 255
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light).........70
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ............................... 196
Checks, Safety.............................................................. 196
Child Restraint ..............................................................185
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ..........................................................187
Child Seat Installation.............................................194
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .................192
Infant And Child Restraints.....................................186
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children...............188
Older Children And Child Restraints.......................187
Seating Positions.....................................................188
Clean Air Gasoline ........................................................275
Cleaning
Wheels .....................................................................266
Climate Control ...............................................................45
Cold Weather Operation................................................. 74
Compact Spare Tire......................................................265
Contract, Service ..........................................................282
Controls .........................................................................125
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)..........................239
Cooling System .............................................................237
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................................238
Coolant Level ................................................. 238
, 239
Cooling Capacity......................................................277
Disposal Of Used Coolant .......................................239
Drain, Flush, And Refill............................................238
Inspection ................................................................239
Points To Remember...............................................239
Pressure Cap ...........................................................239
Radiator Cap............................................................239
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ........238
, 277, 278
Corrosion Protection.....................................................270
Cruise Control .................................................................84
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ......................................84
Cruise Light .....................................................................69
Cupholders
Illuminated................................................................. 50
Customer Assistance ................................................... 280
Customer Programmable Features............................. 107
Cybersecurity ................................................................106
D
Daytime Running Lights................................................. 40
Dealer Service .............................................................. 231
Defroster, Windshield ..................................................197
De-Icer, Remote Start .................................................... 19
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers............................................ 44
Deleting A Phone .......................................................... 139
Deluxe Vehicle Security System .................................... 20
Diagnostic System, Onboard ......................................... 69
Dimmer Control .............................................................. 43
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) .............................................................. 230
Disabled Vehicle Towing .............................................. 221
Disc Drive...................................................................... 133
Disconnecting...............................................................139
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)....................................239
Disturb...........................................................................141
Door Ajar ......................................................................... 64
Door Ajar Light................................................................ 64
Door Locks
Automatic .................................................................. 24
Remote Keyless Entry............................................... 12
Doors............................................................................... 21
Drag & Drop..................................................................123
Drive Modes..................................................................154
Driver Memory Presets ................................................131
Driver Memory Settings ................................................. 27
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
287
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ....................................................28
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water.................................................. 105
E
Electric Brake Control System..................................... 160
Anti-Lock Brake System ......................................... 159
Electronic Roll Mitigation .............................. 160
, 163
Electrical Power Outlets..................................................50
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) ............ 242
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ................................ 161
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light......................65
Emergency Trunk Release..............................................55
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck .................................. 220
Jacking..................................................................... 202
Jump Starting................................................. 216
, 217
Towing ..................................................................... 221
Emission Control System Maintenance.........................70
Engine.................................................................. 228
, 229
Air Cleaner............................................................... 233
Break-In Recommendations .....................................74
Checking Oil Level .................................................. 230
Compartment................................................. 228
, 229
Compartment Identification ................................... 228
Coolant (Antifreeze)................................................ 238
Cooling..................................................................... 237
Exhaust Gas Caution .............................................. 198
Fails To Start ..............................................................74
Flooded, Starting .......................................................74
Fuel Requirements ................................................. 274
Jump Starting................................................. 216
, 217
Oil...........................................................231
, 277, 278
Oil Filler Cap.............................................................228
Oil Filter....................................................................233
Oil Selection................................................... 231
, 277
Oil Synthetic.............................................................232
Starting.......................................................................71
Engine Oil Life Reset
b
...............................................59
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............. 184
, 222
Ethanol ..........................................................................275
Exhaust Gas Cautions ..................................................198
Exhaust System .................................................. 198
, 237
Exterior Lighting ..............................................................39
Exterior Lights ........................................................39
, 198
F
Filler Location Fuel .........................................................96
Filters
Air Cleaner ...............................................................233
Air Conditioning ................................................49
, 234
Engine Oil.................................................................233
Engine Oil Disposal..................................................233
Flashers.........................................................................199
Hazard Warning.......................................................199
Turn Signals...............................................42
, 69, 198
Flash-To-Pass.................................................................. 41
Flooded Engine Starting.................................................74
Fluid Capacities ............................................................277
Fluid Leaks ....................................................................198
Fluid Level Checks
Brake........................................................................240
Cooling System........................................................238
Engine Oil.................................................................230
Transfer Case ..........................................................241
Fluid, Brake...................................................................279
Fog Lights........................................................................ 42
Fold-Flat Seats......................................................... 28
, 30
Forward Collision Warning...........................................167
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...............................................220
Fuel................................................................................274
Additives ..................................................................275
Clean Air ..................................................................275
Ethanol.....................................................................275
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................................................. 96
Gasoline...................................................................274
Materials Added...................................................... 275
Methanol .................................................................275
Octane Rating.................................................274
, 278
Requirements..........................................................274
Specifications..........................................................278
Tank Capacity..........................................................277
Fueling ............................................................................ 96
Fuses............................................................................. 242
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink).................................. 36
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............................................... 96
Gasoline, Clean Air .......................................................275
Gasoline, Reformulated...............................................275
Gear Ranges ................................................................... 79
Glass Cleaning.............................................................. 272
Gross Axle Weight Rating........................................ 98
, 99
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .................................. 98
, 99
GVWR .............................................................................. 98
11
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or
Shallow Standing Water.................................... 105
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................................ 199
Head Restraints ..............................................................34
Head Rests......................................................................34
Headlights
Automatic ...................................................................41
Cleaning................................................................... 270
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch.......................40
Lights On Reminder...................................................41
On With Wipers ..........................................................41
Passing .......................................................................41
Switch .........................................................................39
Time Delay..................................................................41
Washers................................................................... 230
Heated Mirrors ................................................................36
Heated Seats...................................................................31
Heated Steering Wheel...................................................25
Heater ..............................................................................45
Hill Start Assist ............................................................. 162
Hitches
Trailer Towing.......................................................... 100
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ..................................36
Hood Release ..................................................................54
I
Ignition.............................................................................15
Switch .........................................................................15
Illuminated Entry.............................................................43
Information Center, Vehicle............................................58
Inside Rearview Mirror.......................................... 35
, 199
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions........................................................ 56
, 69
Display.................................................................57
, 60
Instrument Cluster
b
.................................................. 57
Instrument Cluster Display
Audio .......................................................................... 62
Driver Assist...............................................................61
Fuel Economy ............................................................ 61
Speedometer.............................................................60
Vehicle Info ................................................................ 60
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .................................272
Interior Appearance Care.............................................271
Interior Lights.................................................................. 42
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...............................44
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ..................................................50
Bluetooth Streaming Audio....................................... 50
J
Jack Location ................................................................202
Jack Operation ..............................................................203
Jacking And Tire Changing
b
....................................202
Jacking Instructions......................................................203
Jump Starting...................................................... 216
, 217
K
Key Fob
Arm The System......................................................... 19
Panic Alarm................................................................13
Programming Additional Key Fobs........................... 15
Unlatch The Trunk ..................................................... 13
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) ......... 13
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry)............ 15
Keyless Enter 'n Go™ ..................................................... 22
Enter The Trunk......................................................... 13
Keys................................................................................. 12
Replacement ............................................................. 15
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals ..................................... 42
Lane Change Assist........................................................ 42
Lap/Shoulder Belts ...................................................... 174
Latches .........................................................................198
Hood........................................................................... 54
Lead Free Gasoline ...................................................... 274
Leaks, Fluid...................................................................198
Life Of Tires...................................................................263
Light Bulbs...........................................................198
, 250
Lights............................................................................. 198
Air Bag......................................................63
, 179, 196
Automatic Headlights ............................................... 41
Brake Assist Warning.............................................. 162
Brake Warning.................................................. 64
, 273
Bulb Replacement ..................................................250
Courtesy/Reading ..................................................... 42
Cruise......................................................................... 69
Daytime Running....................................................... 40
Dimmer Switch, Headlight........................................ 43
Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Indicator ............ 65
Exterior.............................................................. 39
, 198
Fog ............................................................................. 42
Headlight Switch ....................................................... 39
Headlights.................................................................. 39
Headlights On With Wipers....................................... 41
High Beam................................................................. 40
High Beam/Low Beam Select .................................. 40
Illuminated Entry....................................................... 43
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
289
Interior ........................................................................42
License .................................................................... 253
Lights On Reminder...................................................41
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)......................67
Map.............................................................................42
Park .....................................................................41
, 68
Passing .......................................................................41
Reading ......................................................................42
Seat Belt Reminder ...................................................64
Security Alarm............................................................66
Service..................................................................... 250
Traction Control ...................................................... 162
Turn Signals .............................................. 42
, 69, 198
Vanity Mirror...............................................................35
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions.........65
, 69
Load Shed Battery Saver On ..........................................62
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction............................62
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor............................62
Loading Vehicle........................................................97
, 98
Capacities...................................................................98
Tires ......................................................................... 258
Locks
Auto Unlock ................................................................24
Automatic Door ..........................................................24
Power Door.................................................................22
Low Tire Pressure System ........................................... 168
Lubrication, Body ......................................................... 235
Lug Nuts/Bolts ............................................................. 273
M
Maintenance ...................................................................53
Maintenance Free Battery........................................... 231
Maintenance Schedule....................................... 223
, 224
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) ..................67
Manual
Park Release............................................................218
Service .....................................................................283
Manual Transmission.................................. 76
, 240, 241
Fluid Level Check .......................................... 240
, 241
Map/Reading Lights.......................................................42
Media Mode..................................................................133
Memory Seat................................................................... 27
Memory Settings.............................................................27
Methanol .......................................................................275
Mirrors .............................................................................35
Electric Powered........................................................ 36
Heated........................................................................ 36
Outside....................................................................... 35
Rearview ...........................................................35
, 199
Vanity.......................................................................... 35
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle.......................................................................... 8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.....................................168
Mopar Parts ..................................................................282
Multi-Function Control Lever..........................................40
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period.......................................... 74
O
Occupant Restraints.....................................................172
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .......................... 274
, 278
Oil Change Indicator ....................................................... 59
Reset .......................................................................... 59
Oil Filter, Change ..........................................................233
Oil Filter, Selection........................................................233
Oil Pressure Light............................................................ 65
Oil, Engine ........................................................... 231
, 278
Capacity ...................................................................277
Checking.................................................................. 230
Dipstick.................................................................... 230
Disposal................................................................... 233
Filter.........................................................................233
Filter Disposal..........................................................233
Identification Logo ..................................................232
Materials Added To................................................. 233
Pressure Warning Light ............................................ 65
Recommendation...........................................231
, 277
Synthetic..................................................................232
Viscosity...................................................................277
Onboard Diagnostic System .......................................... 69
Operating Precautions ................................................... 69
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ...................................................... 283
Outside Rearview Mirrors .............................................. 35
P
Paddle Shift Mode.......................................................... 82
Paddle Shifters ............................................................... 82
Paint Care .....................................................................270
Pair (link) Uconnect Phone To A mobile Phone
b
... 137
Panic Alarm..................................................................... 13
Parking Brake ................................................................. 74
ParkSense System, Rear ............................................... 92
Passenger Seat
Easy Entry .................................................................. 33
Passing Light .................................................................. 41
Performance ................................................................... 60
Performance Shift Indicator .......................................... 59
Personalized Main Menu Bar ...................................... 123
Pets ............................................................................... 196
Phone Mode .................................................................135
11
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290
Pinch Protection..............................................................53
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ....................... 258
Power
Brakes ..................................................................... 273
Distribution Center (Fuses).................................... 246
Door Locks .................................................................22
Mirrors ........................................................................36
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .............................50
Seats...........................................................................30
Steering ......................................................................83
Sunroof.......................................................................52
Windows .....................................................................52
Power Seats
Lumbar .......................................................................31
Power Steering Fluid.................................................... 279
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts................................ 176
Preparation For Jacking............................................... 202
Presets.......................................................................... 131
Pretensioners
Seat Belts................................................................ 177
Programmable Features.............................................. 107
R
Radial Ply Tires............................................................. 262
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)......................... 239
Radio
Presets..................................................................... 131
Radio Controls.............................................................. 125
Radio Mode .................................................................. 125
Radio Operation ..................................................125
, 158
Radio Remote Controls................................................ 124
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .........................................45
Rear Camera................................................................... 96
Rear ParkSense System................................................. 92
Rear Seats, Folding ........................................................ 30
Recreational Towing .....................................................104
Reformulated Gasoline ................................................275
Refrigerant ....................................................................234
Release, Hood................................................................. 54
Reminder, Lights On.......................................................41
Reminder, Seat Belt .....................................................173
Remote Control
Starting System .........................................................17
Remote Keyless Entry ....................................................12
Arm The Alarm ........................................................... 19
Panic Alarm................................................................13
Programming Additional Key Fobs........................... 15
Unlatch The Trunk .....................................................13
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control.......................124
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode............................................18
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features ......... 18
Uconnect Settings .....................................................18
Remote Starting System ................................................ 17
Remote Trunk Release................................................... 54
Replacement Bulbs ......................................................250
Replacement Keys.......................................................... 15
Replacement Tires........................................................263
Reporting Safety Defects .............................................282
Restraints, Child ...........................................................185
Restraints, Head.............................................................34
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck .......................................220
Rotation, Tires...............................................................268
S
Safety ............................................................................ 123
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle.......................................196
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle....................................198
Safety Defects, Reporting............................................ 282
Safety Features ............................................................ 123
Safety Information, Tire ...............................................253
Safety Tips .................................................................... 196
Safety, Exhaust Gas ..................................................... 198
Satellite Radio .............................................................. 126
Saved Radio Stations................................................... 131
Schedule, Maintenance......................................223
, 224
Seat Belt Reminder........................................................ 64
Seat Belts.............................................................172
, 196
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)........................177
Child Restraints.......................................................185
Energy Management Feature.................................177
Extender................................................................... 176
Front Seat............................................. 172
, 174, 175
Inspection................................................................196
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................................175
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................................176
Lap/Shoulder Belts.................................................174
Operating Instructions ............................................ 175
Pregnant Women ....................................................176
Pretensioners ..........................................................177
Rear Seat.................................................................174
Reminder .................................................................173
Seat Belt Extender ..................................................176
Seat Belt Pretensioner............................................ 177
Untwisting Procedure..............................................176
Seat Belts Maintenance .............................................. 271
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
291
Seats................................................................................28
Adjustment.................................................................28
Easy Entry...................................................................31
Head Restraints.........................................................34
Heated........................................................................31
Height Adjustment.....................................................30
Power..........................................................................30
Rear Folding........................................................28
, 30
Seatback Release......................................................30
Tilting ............................................................28
, 30, 33
Vented ........................................................................32
Ventilated ...................................................................32
Security Alarm ...................................................19
, 20, 66
Arm The System.........................................................19
Sentry Key (Immobilizer).................................................15
Sentry Key Replacement ................................................15
Service Assistance ....................................................... 280
Service Contract........................................................... 282
Service Manuals........................................................... 283
Settings, Audio ............................................................. 131
Shift Indicator Light.........................................................77
Shifting.............................................................................78
Automatic Transmission.....................................78
, 79
Shoulder Belts.............................................................. 174
Side View Mirror Adjustment..........................................35
Signals, Turn................................................... 42
, 69, 198
Sirius Satellite Radio ................................................... 126
Favorites.................................................................. 129
Replay...................................................................... 128
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM ........................................................ 129
Favorites.................................................................. 129
Replay...................................................................... 128
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ...........................................267
Snow Tires.....................................................................264
Spare Tires ........................................202
, 264, 265, 266
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline).........................................................278
Oil .............................................................................278
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......................................84
Sport Mode .....................................................................83
Starting............................................................................ 71
Automatic Transmission ........................................... 71
Button.........................................................................15
Cold Weather .............................................................74
Engine Fails To Start ................................................. 74
Remote.......................................................................17
Starting And Operating................................................... 71
Starting Procedures........................................................71
Steering
Column Lock..............................................................24
Power ......................................................................... 83
Tilt Column................................................................. 24
Wheel, Heated ........................................................... 25
Wheel, Tilt .................................................................. 24
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ....................................124
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ....................124
Storage ...................................................................49
, 269
Storage, Vehicle.....................................................48
, 269
Store Radio Presets......................................................131
Storing Your Vehicle .....................................................269
Stuck, Freeing...............................................................220
Sun Roof................................................................... 52
, 53
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag..................180
Symbol Glossary ............................................................... 9
Synthetic Engine Oil......................................................232
System, Remote Starting ...............................................17
T
Telescoping Steering Column........................................ 24
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ......................... 48
Tilt Steering Column....................................................... 24
Time Delay
Headlight ................................................................... 41
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........................258
Tire Markings................................................................254
Tire Safety Information ................................................253
Tire Service Kit .......................................... 211
, 212, 213
Tire Service Kit — If Equipped
b
..............................206
Tires..........................................198
, 261, 264, 265, 268
Aging (Life Of Tires).................................................263
Air Pressure ............................................................. 261
Chains......................................................................267
Changing.........................................................202
, 203
Compact Spare........................................................265
General Information............................. 261
, 264, 265
High Speed .............................................................. 262
Inflation Pressure....................................................261
Jacking............................................................202
, 203
Life Of Tires ............................................................. 263
Load Capacity..........................................................258
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).............. 67
, 168
Quality Grading........................................................268
Radial....................................................................... 262
Replacement ...........................................................263
Rotation ...................................................................268
Safety..............................................................253
, 261
Sizes.........................................................................255
Snow Tires ...............................................................264
Spare Tires .................................. 202
, 264, 265, 266
11
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292
Spinning .................................................................. 262
Trailer Towing.......................................................... 102
Tread Wear Indicators............................................ 263
Wheel Nut Torque................................................... 273
To Open Hood..................................................................54
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................................... 101
Towing..............................................................................98
Disabled Vehicle ..................................................... 221
Guide ....................................................................... 100
Recreational............................................................ 104
Weight...................................................................... 100
Towing Behind A Motorhome ...................................... 104
Traction......................................................................... 104
Traction Control............................................................ 163
Trailer Towing ..................................................................98
Hitches .................................................................... 100
Minimum Requirements ........................................ 101
Tips .......................................................................... 103
Trailer And Tongue Weight..................................... 101
Wiring....................................................................... 102
Trailer Towing Guide .................................................... 100
Trailer Weight ............................................................... 100
Transfer Case
Fluid................................................................241
, 279
Maintenance........................................................... 241
Transmission................................................................... 79
Automatic...................................................78
, 79, 241
Fluid..........................................................................279
Maintenance............................................................241
Manual .......................................................................76
Shifting.......................................................................78
Transporting Pets .........................................................196
Tread Wear Indicators..................................................263
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid)........................................................54
Trunk Release Remote Control......................................54
Trunk Release, Emergency ............................................55
Turn Signals ............................................................. 42
, 69
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features................................................140
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone.................................................142
Uconnect Settings .....................................................18
Uconnect Phone ........................................136
, 137, 138
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress ..................................141
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress.............................141
Bluetooth Communication Link..............................144
Call Continuation..................................................... 142
Call Controls ............................................................140
Call Termination...................................................... 142
Cancel Command.................................................... 137
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing ............................139
Help Command .......................................................137
Join Calls.................................................................. 142
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite......... 139
Making A Second Call While Current Call
Is In Progress ..................................................... 142
Managing Your Favorites........................................140
Natural Speech .......................................................136
Operation.................................................................136
Overview .................................................................. 135
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone.... 137
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device .............138
Phonebook Download............................................. 139
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold............................ 142
Power-Up.................................................................. 144
Recent Calls ............................................................ 141
Redial....................................................................... 142
To Remove A Favorite............................................. 140
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
293
Toggling Between Calls .......................................... 142
Touch-Tone Number Entry...................................... 141
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone.............. 142
Voice Command...................................................... 142
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ..........................18
Uconnect System ......................................................... 121
Uconnect Voice Command .............................................26
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ........................................ 268
Universal Garage Door Opener (homelink®)
b
..........36
Unleaded Gasoline....................................................... 274
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................................. 176
V
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................................35
Vehicle Certification Label..............................................98
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........................... 273
Vehicle Loading.............................................. 97
, 98, 258
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................................... 8
Vehicle Security Alarm....................................................19
Vehicle Storage ..................................................... 48
, 269
Voice Command .................................................. 145
, 147
Voice Recognition System (VR) ......................................26
W
Warning Lights
Blue ............................................................................ 69
Green.......................................................................... 68
Red .............................................................................63
White .......................................................................... 69
Yellow .........................................................................66
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions) .......66
Warning Lights And Messages.......................................63
Warranty Information ...................................................282
Washer
Adding Fluid .............................................................230
Washers, Windshield.............................................44
, 230
Washing Vehicle ...........................................................270
Water
Driving Through .......................................................105
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .........................................266
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim..........................................266
Wind Buffeting ................................................................ 52
Window Fogging ............................................................. 48
Windows.......................................................................... 52
Power ......................................................................... 52
Windshield Defroster ................................................... 197
Windshield Washers ...................................................... 44
Fluid .........................................................................230
Windshield Wiper Blades............................................. 236
Windshield Wipers.......................................................... 44
Wipers Blade Replacement .........................................236
Wipers, Intermittent ....................................................... 44
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ................................................... 45
11
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal
injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical
devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead
to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself unable to devote your full attention
to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is
always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Dodge brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Dodge brand
dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend, or use public
transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have
been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling
your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of your Dodge brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the
ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “Dodge” (U.S. residents only).
FIRST EDITION
23_LA_OM_EN_USC
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
mopar.com/om
U. S.
owners.mopar.ca
Canada
©2022 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. TOUS DROITS RÉSERVÉS. DODGE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC OR FCA CANADA INC., USED UNDER LICENSE. DODGE EST UNE MARQUE
DÉPOSÉE DE FCA US LLC OU FCA CANADA INC., UTILISÉE SOUS LE PERMIS. APP STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF APPLE INC. GOOGLE PLAY STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF GOOGLE.
